Professional Documents
Culture Documents
KV Builder User's Manual
KV Builder User's Manual
KV Builder User's Manual
KV-H1WE2
Before using this software, be sure to thoroughly read this User's
Manual. After you are finished with this User's Manual, be sure to store
it in a safe place for quick reference.
Preface
The KV BUILDER ladder programming software features easy operation and high-
grade programming capabilities.
This manual provides a brief outline of KV BUILDER and describes how to use KV
BUILDER functions.
Be sure to thoroughly read and fully understand this manual before you start to use
KV BUILDER. Also, store this manual in a safe place after use.
Safety Precautions
This manual describes how to handle, operational procedures, and precautions
when using the KV BUILDER (KV-H1WE2). Before you start to use KV BUILDER
(KV- H1WE2), be sure to thoroughly read this manual in order to fully understand its
functions.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can retrieve it whenever necessary.
Also, make sure that this document is handed over to the end user.
Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols to alert you to important information.
[Tip]
Indicates useful information or information that aids understanding of text
descriptions.
General Precautions
• When using KV BUILDER, make sure that the function and performance of the
KV-700 CPU Unit and KV series Basic Unit are normal.
• At startup and during operation, be sure to monitor the functions and performance
of the KV series.
• From a fail-safe viewpoint, provide a safety circuit by some means that does not
operate via the programmable controller in the event that an abnormality occurs
on the programmable controller body so that the overall system functions safely.
• Control sometimes can no longer be operated normally due to output circuit or
internal circuit trouble. Be sure to provide a safety circuit in control systems that
may result in serious accidents such as fire.
• Do not modify the KV series or use it in any way other than described in the
specifications. The functions and performance of products used or modified in
this way cannot be assured.
• When the KV series is used in combination with other instruments, functions and
performance may be degraded depending on operating conditions and the
surrounding environment.
• Do not use the KV series for the purpose of protecting the human body.
i
Request
When using the KV series under conditions and environment indicated below, use
with sufficient margin with respect to ratings and functions, adopt safety
countermeasures such as fail-safe measures, and consult your sales
representative.
ii
Software License Agreement
Before you use this software, be sure to read the terms of this agreement.
Once you have started to use this software, it is assumed that you have consented
to these terms, and an agreement is established between KEYENCE
CORPORATION and the user.
Terms
1. Rights of Use
KEYENCE CORPORATION shall permit the user the non-exclusive rights to use
this software in accordance with the terms of this agreement.
2. Copyright
Copyright relating to this software and manual shall belong to KEYENCE
CORPORATION, and the user shall not have rights other than the rights of use.
3. Forbidden Items
The user shall not be able to copy this software, nor be able to sell or distribute it
to a third party. The user, however, shall be able to copy this software for the
purpose of making backups for the user's own use.
4. Exemption of Liabilities
KEYENCE CORPORATION shall not be subject to liability with respect to
damage on the part of the user or a third party as a result of having operated this
software.
5. Cancellation of Agreement
Should the user have violated any terms of this agreement, KEYENCE
CORPORATION shall immediately be able to cancel this agreement, and the user
shall destroy or return this software and copies to KEYENCE CORPORATION.
Trademarks
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States or other respective countries.
• PC-9800, PC-9821, and PC98-NX are registered trademarks of NEC.
• IBM is a registered trademark of IBM Corporation.
• Other company names, product names, and model names used in this manual
are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
iii
How This Manual Is Organized 1
Chapter 1 PREPARATIONS
This chapter describes an outline of KV BUILDER, how to check the package contents, how to connect to a PC, how
to install KV BUILDER, common operation methods, and other basic information. 2
Chapter 2 QUICK GUIDE TO FUNCTIONS
This chapter briefly introduces the functions of KV BUILDER.
3
Chapter 3 MANAGING PROJECTS
This chapter describes batch management of data files for each ladder system using project folders, and
management of projects. 4
Chapter 4 MEMORY CARD
This chapter describes how to transfer ladder diagrams, comments, and other unit setup information with the PLC
via the Memory Card.
5
Chapter 5 UNIT EDITOR
This chapter describes how to select connected units to create unit configurations, and how to transfer unit 6
configurations you have created, and how to use Unit Editor.
Chapter 6 EDITOR
This chapter describes how to use the Editor to edit ladder programs, and how to convert ladder programs for
7
transfer to the KV-700.
Chapter 7 MONITOR 8
This chapter describes how to use monitor functions, Unit Monitor, and the high-speed Time Chart Monitor, and
communications settings.
Chapter 8 SIMULATOR
9
This chapter describes how to use Simulator functions, Ladder Monitor, Batch Monitor and Registration Monitor.
Appendices
These appendices list error codes, how to remedy errors that may occur, instructions, a quick reference and other
information. Read them as required.
v
Contents
Preface
Safety Precautions .................................................................................... i
Software License Agreement ................................................................. iii
How This Manual Is Organized................................................................ v
Contents ................................................................................................... vi
Conventions Used In This Manual ....................................................... xxi
Page Configuration and Symbols....................................................xxi
Terminology ....................................................................................xxii
Symbols .........................................................................................xxii
Chapter 1 PREPARATIONS
1-1 Checking the Package Contents.................................................1-2
vi
How to execute functions (instructions) ..............................1-40
Basic mouse operations ...............................................................1-41
What is "clicking?" ..............................................................1-41
What is "dragging-and-dropping?"......................................1-41
Differences in Key Operations According to Model......................1-42
Help..............................................................................................1-42
vii
Chapter 5 UNIT EDITOR
5-1 Outline of Unit Editor ...................................................................5-2
Outline of Functions .......................................................................5-2
Settings on Unit Editor ...................................................................5-3
viii
Entering Comments......................................................................5-36
Reserving Units ............................................................................5-37
Jumping the Cursor ......................................................................5-37
Jumping to Error Rungs ...............................................................5-38
Changing Unit Illustration Display Mode ......................................5-39
Displaying Help ............................................................................5-39
Chapter 6 EDITOR
6-1 Outline of Functions ....................................................................6-2
Notes When Editing Ladder Programs...........................................6-2
ix
Comment......................................................................................6-12
Find and replace ..........................................................................6-13
Monitors/Simulator .......................................................................6-14
Convert.........................................................................................6-14
View..............................................................................................6-15
Tools.............................................................................................6-16
Window ........................................................................................6-17
Help..............................................................................................6-17
x
Specifying the Default Suffix ........................................................6-75
Changing Operands .....................................................................6-76
Entering/Deleting Connecting Lines .............................................6-78
Entering connecting lines ...................................................6-78
Deleting connecting lines....................................................6-80
Extended Ladder mode ................................................................6-82
Canceling Edit Operations ...........................................................6-83
Undoing the previous edit operation (Undo) .......................6-83
Redoing the previous undo operation (Redo).....................6-83
xi
Turning Ladders into Rung Comments ...................................... 6-119
Setting Transfer of Comments ...................................................6-121
xii
Chapter 7 MONITOR
7-1 Outline of Monitor Functions ......................................................7-2
Outline of Functions .......................................................................7-2
Monitor Restrictions .......................................................................7-2
Cautions during Communications ..................................................7-3
Cautions when the USB Port Is Used ............................................7-3
xiii
Transferring and monitoring ladder programs ....................7-40
Reading programs ..............................................................7-41
Verifying the PLC program..................................................7-42
Editing devices offline .........................................................7-43
End Monitors ......................................................................7-44
Names of Screen Parts and Functions ........................................7-45
xiv
About the Batch Monitor Window .................................................7-76
Saving/Reading Batch Monitor Window .......................................7-76
Saving the Batch Monitor window.......................................7-76
Reading Batch Monitor files................................................7-77
Selecting and Changing Devices .................................................7-79
Selecting devices................................................................7-79
Turning bit devices ON/OFF ...............................................7-80
Changing current values/setting values/attributes ..............7-81
Resetting device values......................................................7-83
xv
High-speed Counter Unit Monitor .....................................7-123
Ethernet Unit Monitor........................................................7-125
Temperature Controller Unit Monitor.................................7-129
Chapter 8 SIMULATOR
8-1 Outline of Simulator Functions...................................................8-2
Outline of Functions .......................................................................8-2
Simulator Restrictions ....................................................................8-2
Common restrictions.............................................................8-2
Restrictions when using KV-10/16/24/40..............................8-3
Restrictions when KV-700 is used ........................................8-5
xvi
8-4 Starting Up and Exiting Simulator ............................................8-14
Starting Up and Exiting Simulator ................................................8-14
Starting up Simulator ..........................................................8-14
Exiting Simulator.................................................................8-15
Names of Screen Parts and Functions ........................................8-15
xvii
Jumping to the start and end of rungs ................................8-44
Searching for instructions and operands ............................8-45
Clearing All Devices .....................................................................8-47
xviii
Ladder Edit view ...................................................................9-5
Data access panel ................................................................9-5
Message panel .....................................................................9-5
Panel preview .......................................................................9-5
Print/print preview .................................................................9-6
Load device comment ..........................................................9-6
Option ...................................................................................9-7
"OK" button ...........................................................................9-7
"Cancel" button .....................................................................9-7
"Help" button.........................................................................9-7
Appendices
1 Error Messages ........................................................................... A-2
System Errors ............................................................................... A-2
Memory Errors............................................................................... A-3
File Errors...................................................................................... A-3
Installer Errors ............................................................................... A-4
Errors That Occur on Editor .......................................................... A-4
Errors That Occur by Conversion.................................................. A-6
Errors That Occur on Simulator..................................................... A-8
System Errors (displayed on Monitor) ........................................... A-8
File-related Errors (displayed on Monitor) ..................................... A-8
Errors That Occur When Monitor is Started Up and
Communications Errors................................................................. A-9
Errors during Ethernet Communications ..................................... A-10
PLC Unit Errors ............................................................................A-11
Errors That Occur on Unit Editor ................................................. A-13
xix
KV-700 Devices .......................................................................... A-47
Control Relays CR ............................................................. A-47
Control Memory CM........................................................... A-52
10 Index........................................................................................... A-83
Revision History
xx
Conventions Used In This Manual
The following shows how pages are configured, and the symbols and terminology
used in this manual.
Headline
Mid-heading
Display the flow for
executing commands
Sub-heading from the menu bar using
This describes .
operation procedures. Icons are also displayed
when there are icons on
the tool bar.
Thumbnail index
indicates the chapter. Operation screen
xxi
Terminology
This manual uses the following terminology excluding some instances.
Term Description
KV-700 series Any model in the KEYENCE PLC KV-700 series
CPU Unit
KV-10/16/24/40 Any model in the KEYENCE PLC Visual KV-10/16/24/40 xx series
Basic Unit
KV-P series Any model in the KEYENCE PLC KV-P series
Basic Unit
PLC Programmable controller system in which units are mounted on the
Basic Unit or CPU Unit. Refers to the overall system.
PC Stands for personal computer. Refers to an IBM PC/AT compatible
(DOS/V) machine and the NEC PC-9800 series.
<KV BUILDER> KV BUILDER ladder support software
Ladder The program created using KV BUILDER ladder support software
program
Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols to show menus and buttons.
Symbol Description
{ } These are menu items. Menu items can be selected from the menu
bar.
[ ] These are dialog box names or items names.
" " These are buttons containing text that are used for executing
operations or canceling in dialog boxes, for example.
Ctrl These are keys on the PC's keyboard.
xxii
Chapter 1
PREPARATIONS
This chapter describes an outline of KV BUILDER, how to check the package
contents, how to connect to a PC, how to install KV BUILDER, common
operation methods, and other basic information.
make sure that the package contains everything that it is supposed to contain.
Separate cables are required for connecting the PC to the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-
700.
Prepare the required cable to match the PC model you are using.
"1-3 Connecting Devices" page 1-14
1-2
1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER
PREPARATIONS
BUILDER, its features and functions.
Be sure to read this section before you start to use KV BUILDER.
Compatible machines
A PC on which Windows
98/98SE/Me/2000 or Windows
NT4.0 and Windows XP is pre-
installed and that is equipped
with an RS-232C or USB
interface
(When the PC is equipped with a
USB interface, the PC is limited
to one pre-installed with Windows
98/98SE/Me/2000/Windows XP.)
• IBM PC and PC/AT compatible (DOS/V) machine
CD-ROM drive
Compatible OSs
• Windows 98 • Windows 98SE • Windows Me
• Windows 2000 • Windows NT4.0 • Windows XP
1-3
1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER
Features
Work efficiency improved by multi-file editing function and mouse-based
easy operation
Two or more files can be edited at the same time, allowing ladder diagrams to be
copied-and-pasted between files. Symbols can be copied and moved, and
connecting lines can be easily manipulated with the mouse. Functions can be
called up by one-touch operation from the toolbar, enabling efficients
programming.
1-4
1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER
PREPARATIONS
operated easily by anyone.
• Instruction palette
All instructions are incorporated in a visual
catalog. A new function "ladder catalog
function" is incorporated. All the user has to
do is to paste at the desired insertion
location while viewing the symbols.
Even beginners will find this function handy
as it allows them to create ladders visually.
• Entry by mnemonics
The "mnemonic entry function" is provided for power users who want to enter
functions quickly without using the mouse. This mouse allows the user to build
ladders successively by entering mnemonics.
Not only entry but also copying and deleting have the look and feel of word
processing software.
1-5
1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER
1 Ladder index search function: Jump to the desired search line merely by
clicking the line comment in the "Search" window.
PREPARATIONS
1-6
1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER
PREPARATIONS
Internal device
KV-700
values of device
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
comment file
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
KV-700
Logging data by Excel or other
Memory Card spreadsheet
software
KV BUILDER has substantial functions for saving various internal data on the
KV-700 to files. Data is saved to "CSV format" files. CSV format is an easily
expandable format that enables further processing of KV-700 data on Microsoft
Excel or other spreadsheet software.
1-7
1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER
various ways even at the same DM or relay. Up till now, it has been difficult to
reliably monitor this. KV BUILDER, however, is provided with a unit monitor
function. With this function, exclusive monitor windows for each unit are
displayed based upon the connected unit information. You can confirm the
desired information of each unit merely by opening the required window.
You can tell the ON/OFF states of each I/O terminal at a glance.
KV BUILDER is provided with a device comment display function to make things
easier.
This allows you to tell straight away which unit is assigned to which relay No.
1-8
1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER
PREPARATIONS
KV BUILDER contains the Unit Editor unit setup software. Unit Editor allows you
to set up the functions of individual units in software, something that had to be
performed on the hardware up till now.
All the tasks of setting switches and creation of ladder programs, that had to be
performed separately up till now, can now be performed on a single PC.
Unit setup information is linked in real time on the ladder software. The entire
process from hardware setup through to creation of the ladder program is
performed within a single item of software, resulting in an improved development
environment.
1-9
1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER
1-10
1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER
PREPARATIONS
Three monitors are available: a Ladder Monitor for displaying ladder programs, a
Batch Monitor for displaying a list of devices, and a Registration Monitor for
confirming operation of contacts on the time chart. The windows for these three
monitors can be placed anywhere on screen so that you can monitor and
simulate operation of ladder programs simultaneously on each of these
windows.
1-11
1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER
1 KV BUILDER Functions
KV BUILDER has the following functions.
PREPARATIONS
Unit Editor...
• Builds KV-700 series
systems.
• Sets up each of the units in
the KV-700 series and
assigns relays.
• Can convert ladder
programs for use on KV-
700.
• Can print unit configuration
diagrams and a list of
settings.
Editor...
• Allows you to create ladder
programs using the various
instructions in ladder
programming language.
• Allows you to register
comments to devices and
transfer these comments to the
PLC. Rung comments can also
be transferred to KV-700.
• Allows you to convert ladder
programs you have created to
machine code.
• Allows you to display and print
the ladder program you have
created, a list of mnemonics, label comments, device state of use, and other
information.
Simulator...
• Allows you to simulate
operation of the ladder
program you have created
without the KV-700, KV-
10/16/24/40 connected to
debug the program.
• Allows you to select
continuous real time, single
scan only, single step, for
example, as the debugging
execution mode so that you
can reliably find erroneous
locations in the ladder
program.
• Can execute debugging in
reverse step mode.
1-12
1-2 Outline of KV BUILDER
Monitors... 1
• Allow you to monitor the ON/OFF state of contacts in real time on-line using
PREPARATIONS
the ladder program you have created.
• Allow you to display time charts and transfer ladder programs to KV-700, KV-
10/16/24/40.
1-13
1-3 Connecting Devices
Items to Prepare
Prepare the following items.
Take care when connecting connector cables. Connecting cables to the printer ports
on the PC may damage the PC or the KV series Basic Unit or KV-700 CPU Unit.
Note: • Be sure to use the special cable (OP-35331). Use of a different cable
may cause malfunction.
• Before you connect the KV-700 to the USB connector on the PC, install
KV BUILDER.
"1-4 Installing the Software" page 1-19
• The USB driver for KV-700 must be installed on the PC only when the
KV-700 is connected to the PC for the first time.
"1-5 Installing the USB Driver " page 1-24
1-14
1-3 Connecting Devices
PREPARATIONS
D-Sub 9-pin conversion connector Model No.: OP-26486
Take care when connecting connector cables. Connecting cables to the printer ports
on the PC may damage the PC or KV-10/16/24/40 Basic Unit, KV-700 CPU Unit.
Note: Be sure to use the special cable (OP-26487, OP-26486). Use of a different
cable may cause malfunction.
1-15
1-3 Connecting Devices
Take care when connecting connector cables. Connecting cables to the printer
ports on the PC may damage the PC or KV-10/16/24/40 Basic Unit, KV-700 CPU
Unit.
Note: Be sure to use the special cable (OP-26487, OP-26485). Use of a different
cable may cause malfunction.
1-16
1-3 Connecting Devices
PREPARATIONS
Note: Be sure to use the special cable (OP-26482). Use of a different cable may
cause malfunction.
1-17
1-3 Connecting Devices
1-18
1-4 Installing the Software
PREPARATIONS
Preparing for Installation
Check the following before you start to install KV BUILDER.
Note: KV BUILDER does not run on Windows 3.1. Use Windows 98 or later as
the OS.
1-19
1-4 Installing the Software
1 Installing KV BUILDER
The following describes how to install KV BUILDER taking the following drive
PREPARATIONS
Normally, when an NEC PC-9800 series machine is used, the B drive is the floppy
disk drive and the A drive is the hard disk drive. Specify the drive according to the
operating environment.
2 Insert the KV BUILDER master disk into the CD-ROM drive on the PC.
1-20
1-4 Installing the Software
PREPARATIONS
7 Check the directory to
which KV BUILDER is to
be installed, and click the
"Next" button.
If you continue the
installation without changing
the installation directory, KV
BUILDER will be installed to
"C:\Program
Files\KEYENCE\KVBE\". To
change the installation
directory, click the "Browse"
button, and specify the drive
name and folder.
1-21
1-4 Installing the Software
1-22
1-4 Installing the Software
Uninstalling KV BUILDER 1
The following procedure describes how to uninstall KV BUILDER when it is no
PREPARATIONS
longer required.
3 Double-click the
Add/Remove programs
icon.
The Add/Remove
Programs Properties
dialog box is displayed.
1-23
1-5 Installing the USB Driver
USB interface. This section describes how to install the USB driver.
4 Connect the USB cable A (elongated) connector to the USB port on the
KV-700.
The KV-700 is automatically recognized, and the Add New Hardware Wizard
dialog box is displayed.
1-24
1-5 Installing the USB Driver
PREPARATIONS
Enter "C:\Program
Files\KEYENCE\KVBE" and click the
"Next" button.
This completes installation of the KV-700 USB driver. From the second time that
Windows is booted up, the USB driver need not be installed as the KV-700 is
automatically recognized. KV-700 can be used as it is.
1-25
1-5 Installing the USB Driver
1 Installing on Windows Me
Connect the KV-700 to the PC on which Windows Me is running. The USB driver for
PREPARATIONS
KV-700 must be installed on the PC only when the KV-700 is connected to the PC
for the first time. The USB driver need not be connected from the second connection
onwards as the KV-700 is automatically recognized.
4 Connect the USB cable A (elongated) connector to the USB port on the
PC.
The KV-700 is automatically recognized, and the Add New Hardware Wizard
dialog box is displayed.
7 Enter "C:\Program
Files\KEYENCE\KVBE" and click
the "Next" button.
1-26
1-5 Installing the USB Driver
PREPARATIONS
driver.
This completes installation of the KV-700 USB driver. From the second time that
Windows is booted up, the USB driver need not be installed as the KV-700 is
automatically recognized. KV-700 can be used as it is.
1-27
1-5 Installing the USB Driver
for KV-700 must be installed on the PC only when the KV-700 is connected to the
PC for the first time. The USB driver need not be connected form the second
connection onwards as the KV-700 is automatically recognized.
The following describes the procedure for installing the driver for KV-700 for the first
time on Windows 2000.
The hardware must be detected before installing the USB driver for KV BUILDER.
Install the USB driver by the following procedure.
2 Connect the PC and KV-700 by the USB ports using the USB cable.
The messages "New hardware is found." is displayed, and the Found New
Hardware Wizard is displayed.
1-28
1-5 Installing the USB Driver
5 Mark only the "Specify a location" checkbox, and click the "Next" button. 1
PREPARATIONS
6 Specify the directory in which KV BUILDER is installed, and click the
"Open" button.
1-29
1-5 Installing the USB Driver
Note: Sometimes the message "Could not find digital signature." and a dialog
box are displayed depending on the PC you are using. If this happens,
click the "OK" button to continue installation.
1-30
1-5 Installing the USB Driver
Installing on Windows XP 1
Connect the KV-700 to the PC on which Windows XP is running. The USB driver
PREPARATIONS
for KV-700 must be installed on the PC only when the KV-700 is connected to
the PC for the first time. The USB driver need not be installed from the second
connection onwards as the KV-700 is automatically recognized.
The following describes the procedure for installing the driver for KV-700 for the
first time on Windows XP.
The hardware must be detected before installing the USB driver for KV
BUILDER.
2 Connect the PC and KV-700 by the USB ports using the USB cable.
The message "New hardware is found." is displayed, and the Found New
Hardware Wizard is displayed.
1-31
1-5 Installing the USB Driver
1 4 Select the "Search for the best driver in these locations" radio button,
and mark the "Include this location in the search" checkbox.
PREPARATIONS
1-32
1-5 Installing the USB Driver
PREPARATIONS
This complete installation of the KV-700 USB driver.
1-33
1-6 Precautions Upon Use
Display resolution
Be sure to use a display having a resolution of 800 x 600 dots at 256 colors or more.
Also, use as large a display as possible for ease of operation. (1280 x 1024 dots or
more is recommended.)
1-34
1-7 Basic Operations
PREPARATIONS
software, and other basic information you should know before you start to use KV
BUILDER for actual programming.
1-35
1-7 Basic Operations
1
PREPARATIONS
1-36
1-7 Basic Operations
PREPARATIONS
Starting Up and Exiting KV BUILDER
The following describes how to start up and exit KV BUILDER.
Starting Up KV BUILDER
The following describes how to start up KV BUILDER.
Other procedure
Click the icon.
[Tip]
"Setting Animation of Title Screen" page 6-169
1-37
1-7 Basic Operations
1 Exiting KV BUILDER
The following describes how to exit KV BUILDER.
PREPARATIONS
Other procedure
• Press the Alt + F4 keys.
• Click the button at the right edge of the title
bar.
About Screens
Mode windows
The screens for each of the KV BUILDER modes are interlinked as follows:
The name and functions of each window are described on the following pages:
Editor "Chapter 6, EDITOR" (page 6-1)
Monitor "Chapter 7, MONITOR" (page 7-1)
Simulator "Chapter 8, SIMULATOR" (page 8-1)
1-38
1-7 Basic Operations
Current window 1
The active or currently selected window is called the "current window."
PREPARATIONS
To select the window to work in when two or more windows are opened in the
screen for each mode, perform either of the following. (Normally, the topmost title
bar indicates the current window.)
Other procedure
• Click the title bar of the window you want to specify as the current window.
• Select {Window} from Menu, and select the title of the window you want to
specify as the current window.
1-39
1-7 Basic Operations
proceeded with even more efficiently by using keyboard operations (short-cut keys)
together with mouse operations.
How to execute functions (instructions)
Operations on KV BUILDER can be executed quickly by one-touch operation as
frequently used functions are assigned to toolbars and function keys. Functions can
be quickly executed by using short-cut keys or the short-cut menu that is displayed
by clicking the right mouse button.
[Tip]
• In this manual, menus, buttons and keys that are used for each function can be
seen at a glance as they are displayed at the right edge of each title.
• Short-cut keys are displayed at the right edge of menus in the software.
[Example]
There are three ways of entering connecting lines.
By pressing keys
F8 , / : Draws a vertical connecting line downwards from the cursor
position.
F9 , : Draws a horizontal connecting line rightwards from the cursor
position.
Alt + : Draws a connecting line to the top/bottom/left/right according
to the arrow key you press.
Ctrl + Tab , Alt + : Draws a connecting line from the cursor position to the end of
the rung.
By clicking icons
: Draws a vertical connecting line downwards from the cursor position.
: Draws a horizontal connecting line rightwards from the cursor position.
By using the mouse and arrow keys in the Connecting Line Edit mode
In this mode, connecting lines can be drawn using the mouse and arrow keys.
Set the Connecting Line Edit mode as follows.
Perform the same to return to the normal Edit mode from the Connecting Line Edit
mode.
Other procedure
• Select {Edit} {Edit connecting line}
from Menu.
• Press the Ctrl + K keys.
• Press the ¥ key.
1-40
1-7 Basic Operations
PREPARATIONS
Windows operations need read this item.
What is "clicking?"
Left double-click
This is the operation of quickly pressing the
left mouse button continuously two times in a
row. It is used, for example, for opening the
Instruction Entry dialog box on the ladder
program window. This manual refers to this
operation simply as "double-click."
Left click
This is the operation of pressing the left
mouse button once. It is used, for example,
for pressing buttons or for moving the cursor
to the entry location in text entry boxes. This
manual refers to this operation simply as
"click."
Right click
This is the operation of pressing the right mouse
button once. It is used for displaying the short cut
menu matched to the current operating
circumstances to facilitate and speed up tasks.
For example, if you right click on the ladder
program menu, "Cut", "Copy", "Paste", "Edit
connecting line" and other functions (instructions)
can be executed.
What is "dragging-and-dropping?"
This operation involves the following. Press the left mouse button at the first position
for selecting something, move the mouse cursor with the button held down, and
release the button at the final position. Dragging-and-dropping is used for selecting
a range or drawing connecting lines. Bringing a selected object onto another
position or window and releasing the button is called "dropping." Dropping is used
for moving and copying, or registering something. With KV BUILDER, devices can
be registered by selecting the device in the Ladder Monitor and dragging-and-
dropping the selected device in Registration Monitor or Batch Monitor.
1-41
1-7 Basic Operations
Japanese keyboards). This manual uses the DOS/V keytops in its descriptions. So,
when you are using an NEC PC-9800 machine, take the differences shown the
following table into consideration.
Help
KV BUILDER is provided with on-line help.
If you are unsure of an operation, you can display the Help window either by clicking
the button on the toolbar, or by selecting {Help} on the menu bar.
1-42
Chapter 2
QUICK GUIDE TO FUNCTIONS
This chapter briefly introduces the functions of KV BUILDER.
Saving to Memory
Ladder programs and logging data Card
can be saved to Memory Card.
Page 4-1
2-2
2-1 Quick Guide
Name of Function
Example Illustration Function
and Reference Page
Password Functions
Secure password functions are
Page 6-146
incorporated.
Editing Positioning
Parameters
Though easy-to-operate, the software
incorporates professional positioning Page 6-147
functions. Positioning parameters can Positioning
be prepared by selecting from a list. Instructions
Page 6-71
2-3
2-1 Quick Guide
Name of Function
Example Illustration Function
and Reference Page
USB transfer enables transfer of data
much faster that conventional serial
2 data transfer, enabling the smooth
Setting the USB Port
Page 7-20
transfer of ladder programs and
monitoring of device operation.
QUICK GUIDE TO FUNCTIONS
Registration Monitor
You can monitor the current values Page 7-84
and setting values of timers and Page 8-59
counters as a list while monitoring
execution of the ladder program, Batch Monitor
enabling an improved debugging Page 7-73
environment. Page 8-48
2-4
Chapter 3
MANAGING PROJECTS
This chapter describes batch management of data files for each ladder
system using project folders, and management of projects.
A single project folder contains data for the following support tools:
• KV BUILDER
• Unit Editor
• CPU Positioning Parameter Editor
When a project is created on KV BUILDER, the project folder and data files for KV
BUILDER are automatically created. The data for each of the other support tools
(Unit Editor, CPU Positioning Parameter Editor) is automatically created in the
project folder containing the ladder data that was active when the respective support
tool was created.
Note: Unit Editor, CPU Positioning Parameter Editor and Positioning Unit/Simple
Setup can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is selected in the
PLC setting.
C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\KVBE\PROJECT
3-2
3-1 Managing Projects
[Example]
When the project folder "USER" has been created
C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\KVB\PROJECT\USER
3
MANAGING PROJECTS
and, data files for KV BUILDER and other user data files are stored under the
folder "USER".
Structure of folders
In this example, let's assume that the project folder "USER" has been created.
The structure of the folder is as follows:
[Tip]
Hatched areas are fixed and predetermined folders. As the default, project
folders are created under folders.
3-3
3-1 Managing Projects
3 *.CM2
*.CM3
: Device comment 2 file
: Device comment 3 file
*.LVL : Label file
MANAGING PROJECTS
[Tip]
• Data files for KV BUILDER are created automatically under the same file name
as the project folder name.
• If the project folder (folder "USER" in the example on page 3-3) is copied when
the ladder program file is copied, all programs in the project folder are copied.
"Copying Projects" page 3-6
3-4
3-1 Managing Projects
MANAGING PROJECTS
Changing project names
To change a project name, click the project name and enter the new name.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + O keys.
2 Select the folder whose project name is to be changed, and click the right
mouse button.
The pop-up menu is displayed.
Note: Only the name of the project folder can be changed when "changing
project names." The data in the project folder is not changed even if its
name is changed. To also change the names of data files in the project
folder, use "Save ladder diagram as..." in the Edit screen.
"Saving Files" page 6-34
3-5
3-1 Managing Projects
Deleting projects
To delete a project, either select the name of the project, and press the Delete key, or
click the right mouse button, and select "Delete" from the pop-up menu.
1 Select {File (F)} {Open ladder (O)}.
The Open dialog box opens.
Other procedure
3 • Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + O keys.
MANAGING PROJECTS
Note: When you delete a project folder, all of the data in that project folder is
deleted.
Copying projects
To copy a project, either select the name of the project, press the Ctrl + C keys to
copy and the Ctrl + V keys to paste the project, or click the right mouse button, and
select "Copy" followed by "Paste" from the pop-up menu.
1 Select {File (F)} {Open ladder (O)}.
The Open dialog box opens.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + O keys.
3-6
Chapter 4
MEMORY CARD
This chapter describes how to transfer ladder diagrams, comments, and other
unit setup information to the PLC via the Memory Card.
4
Examples of Memory Card use
MEMORY CARD
• Ladder programs can be easily maintained. Memory Cards support the easy
maintenance of devices and transfer of ladder data resulting from changes
made to specifications.
4-2
4-2 Enabling Use of Memory Cards
MEMORY CARD
Memory capacity 16MBytes
Max. number of rewrites 300,000
Operating temperature -25 to +85°C
Storage temperature -40 to +85°C
• Data saved on Memory Cards may become lost in the following instances. Note
that KEYENCE CORPORATION cannot assume any liability for lost data
recorded on Memory Cards.
• When the user or a third party has used a Memory Card in the wrong way
• When a Memory Card has been subjected to static electricity or electrical noise
• When a Memory Card has been removed or other equipment has been turned
OFF during accessing of the Memory Card for saving or deleting data
• We recommend saving important data to MO disk, floppy disk or other storage
media, and keeping backups at all times.
Required hardware
How the adapter or Card Reader is connected varies according to whether or not
the PC is equipped with a PCMCIA slot or USB port.
4-3
4-2 Enabling Use of Memory Cards
[Tip]
Memory Card Adapter
This unit is used for inserting the Memory Card (OP-42137) into the PC card slot
on the PC or Card Reader/Writer. When the Memory Card Adapter BN-SDAAP3
is used, Memory Cards can be treated as PCM-CIA2.1/JEIDA4.2 compliant PC
cards (TypeII).
For details on the Memory Card Adapter, refer to the user's manual provided with
the Memory Card Adapter.
4
MEMORY CARD
4-4
4-2 Enabling Use of Memory Cards
MEMORY CARD
PC supporting USB Memory Card
Card Reader/Writer
interface OP-42137
[Tip]
USB Card Reader/Writer
This unit is for reading data on Memory Card (OP-42137) on a PC equipped with
a USB port. This unit cannot be used on a PC not equipped with a USB port.
For details on USB Card Reader for multimedia cards, refer to the user's manual
provided with the USB Card Reader.
4-5
4-2 Enabling Use of Memory Cards
2 Double-click the
System icon.
The System Properties
dialog box is displayed.
4-6
4-2 Enabling Use of Memory Cards
MEMORY CARD
3 Double-click the System
icon.
The System Properties dialog
box is displayed.
4-7
4-2 Enabling Use of Memory Cards
4
MEMORY CARD
Pay attention to the direction that the Memory Card is facing when you attach the
Memory Card to the Memory Card Adapter. If you try to force the Memory Card into
the Memory Card Adapter facing the wrong direction, you might damage the
Memory Card or the Memory Card Adapter.
3 Attach the Memory Card Adapter to the PCMCIA slot on the laptop PC or
Card Reader/Writer.
When you are using the Memory Card Adapter for the first time, the message
"New hardware is found." when you are running Windows 2000/XP, or the Add
New Hardware Wizard is displayed when you are running Windows 98. This
message or Wizard is not displayed from the second Memory Card attachment
onwards.
For details on how to use the Memory Card, refer to the user's manual
provided with the Memory Card Adapter.
Connect to laptop PC.
• For details on how to connect the Memory Card Adapter, refer to the user's
manual provided with the laptop PC or Card Reader/Writer.
• Pay attention to the direction that the Memory Card Adapter is facing when you
connect the Memory Card Adapter to the PCMCIA slot.
If you try to force the Memory Card into the PCMCIA slot facing the wrong
direction, you might damage the Memory Card Adapter or the PCMCIA slot.
4-8
4-2 Enabling Use of Memory Cards
MEMORY CARD
1 Select {Start} {Settings} {Control
Panel} in that order.
The Control Panel is displayed.
2 Double-click the
System icon.
The System Properties
dialog box is displayed.
3 Click the Device Manager tab to display the connected devices, and
make sure that USB Reader Writer for SD Memory Card is displayed.
4-9
4-2 Enabling Use of Memory Cards
USB Reader/Writer
• Pay attention to the direction that the Memory Card is facing when you attach the
Memory Card to the USB Card Reader/Writer. If you try to force the Memory Card
into the USB Card Reader/Writer facing the wrong direction, you might damage
the Memory Card or the USB Card Reader/Writer.
• For details on how to attach the Memory Card to the USB Card Reader/Writer,
refer to the user's manual provided with the USB Card Reader/Writer.
4-10
4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards
MEMORY CARD
Important: On Memory Cards, only one level can be created for folders. For this
reason, additional project folders cannot be created within project
folders.
[Tip]
• When saving ladder program files on the KV-700 CPU Unit access window, the
project folder "KVSAVE**" (** stands for any number) is automatically created
each time that a save is executed.
• When using the auto-load function on the KV-700 CPU Unit, provide
"autoload" as the name of the project folder when saving data.
"KV-700 Series User's Manual"
4-11
4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards
Note: Only single-byte alphanumeric characters can be used for file names and
project folder names. The following characters cannot be used:
\ / . _ (space) * ? , " : ; < > = +
4-12
4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards
MEMORY CARD
Note: Only single-byte alphanumeric characters can be used for file names and
project folder names. The following characters cannot be used:
\ / . _ (space) * ? , " : ; < > = +
4-13
4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards
*1
Ladder program .ZCD
Device comment .ZCT*1
Unit setup information .ZLB*1
DM DM.ZDV
KV BUILDER CM CM.ZDV KV BUILDER
Device file
RLY R.ZDV
CR CR.ZDV
CPU positioning function CPUMB.ZSH
parameter file
*1 "" stands for same text name as project folder.
*2 File cannot be saved to Memory Card from CPU access window.
The content of the parameters set in the KV-BUILDER Simple Setup window are saved on KV-BUILDER.
Note: Only single-byte alphanumeric characters can be used for file names and
project folder names. The following characters cannot be used:
\ / . _ (space) * ? , " : ; < > = +
4-14
4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards
Saving and reading ladder programs, device comments and unit setup information
Follow the procedure below to save or read ladder programs, device comments and
unit setup information. 4
1 Connect the Memory Card to the PC.
MEMORY CARD
"Attaching the Memory Card" pages 4-8, 4-10
Note: • {Read Memory Card} or {Write Memory Card} cannot be selected when
the PLC model setting for the currently active ladder program is not KV-
700 or KV-700+M.
• When you save device comments to Memory Card, you can select the
comment save range beforehand in the comment transfer setting.
"Setting Transfer of Comments" page 6-121
If you select an existing folder and save the ladder program file to that folder, the
data in the folder will be overwritten, and the previous data will be lost.
4-15
4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards
[Tip]
• To create a new folder and save data
to that folder, click the "New" button
and enter the folder name.
A new project folder is created.
• Data on Memory Cards is managed in project folder units.
• When using the auto-load function on the KV-700 CPU Unit, provide
"autoload" as the name of the project folder when saving data.
"KV-700 Series User's Manual"
4 • The types of files currently saved to the selected folder are displayed using the
following abbreviations in the Memory Card dialog box:
MEMORY CARD
4-16
4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards
Saving and reading DM/CM values, and relay and control relay ON/OFF states
DM/CM values, and relay and control relay ON/OFF states can be saved to Memory
Cards from monitors or read from Memory Cards.
Pay attention to the following points:
• Data on Memory Card is read from the Batch Change window.
• Data is saved to Memory Cards within the device range selected on the
Batch Change window.
• Only devices currently displayed on the Batch Change window are read.
• When reading two or more devices, display the respective Batch Change
window.
• Only DM/CM/R/CR data is saved to or read from Memory Card. Also, file
4
names are fixed to DM.ZDV, CM.ZDV, R.ZDV, and CR.ZDV.
MEMORY CARD
Saving data to Memory Card or reading data from Memory Card while on-
line (in monitoring state) with KV-700
Follow the procedure below to save data to Memory Card from a monitor or read
data from Memory Card.
2 Select
{Monitor/Simulator (M)}
{PLC Monitor (M)}
from Menu in the Editor.
The Monitor is displayed.
Other procedure
Click the button.
[Tip]
Two or more Batch Change windows can be displayed simultaneously.
4-17
4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards
[Tip]
• To create a new folder and save
data to that folder, click the "New"
button and enter the folder name.
A new project folder is created.
• The types of files currently saved to the selected folder are displayed using the
following abbreviations in the Memory Card dialog box:
UNIT: Unit setup information
PROG: Ladder program
CMT: Device comments
CPUM: CPU positioning function parameter file
DM: DM values
CM: CM values
R: Relay ON/OFF states
CR: Control relay ON/OFF states
4-18
4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards
Saving data to Memory Card or reading data from Memory Card while off-
line (not in monitoring state) with KV-700
Follow the procedure below to save or read data to or from Memory Cards in an
off-line state. 4
1
MEMORY CARD
Connect the Memory Card to the PC.
"Connecting the Memory Card" pages 4-8, 4-10
Other procedure
Click the button.
[Tip]
Two or more Batch Change windows can be displayed simultaneously.
4-19
4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards
4
MEMORY CARD
[Tip]
• To create a new folder and save
data to that folder, click the "New"
button and enter the folder name.
A new project folder is created.
• The types of files currently saved to the selected folder are displayed using the
following abbreviations in the Memory Card dialog box:
UNIT: Unit setup information
PROG: Ladder program
CMT: Device comments
CPUM: CPU positioning function parameter file
DM: DM values
CM: CM values
R: Relay ON/OFF states
CR: Control relay ON/OFF states
4-20
4-3 Managing Data on Memory Cards
MEMORY CARD
4-21
Chapter 5
UNIT EDITOR
This chapter describes how to use the Unit Editor functions.
Unit Editor is a function that is available when the KV-700 is used.
Outline of Functions
With the KV-700 series, connected units must be registered to the CPU before the
ladder program is executed.
Use Unit Editor to select connected units to create a unit configuration, and transfer
the unit configuration you have made to the CPU.
On conventional PLC types, hardware settings had to be made on each unit by
setting the DIP switches. However, with the KV-700, hardware settings are basically
5 no longer required, and units can be set up simply in Unit Editor. After you have built
your system, you can change settings without having to remove units.
UNIT EDITOR
Note: • Unit Editor can be used only when the PLC type is set to "KV-700" or
"KV-700+M".
• The unit setup information that can be set on Unit Editor is basically one
information file per ladder program.
• Unit Editor cannot be started up independently. A ladder program must
be opened first before Unit Editor is started up.
5-2
5-1 Outline of Unit Editor
UNIT EDITOR
Setting relay/DM assignments for units
When setting relays/DMs other than for the CPU unit on the KV-700, set relay
Nos. within the range 01000 to 59915, and DM Nos. within the range DM00000
to DM19999 ((DM00000 to DM39999) when extended memory (OP-42138) is
mounted).
Relay/DM assignments can be set either manually or automatically.
Setting relays/DMs separately by input/output and by special unit
5-3
5-1 Outline of Unit Editor
Mistakes are possible as you set up units Easy setup. Just select according to the menu.
while reading the manual.
5
UNIT EDITOR
5-4
5-2 Table of Unit Editor Tool Bar Functions
Standard
UNIT EDITOR
Print Prints the unit setup information. 5-40
Print preview Displays a preview of the unit setup information in its printed form. 5-42
5-5
5-3 Screen Menus
File
This menu groups file operation and printing related items.
5
UNIT EDITOR
Edit
This menu groups the various items that can be used when editing unit information.
5-6
5-3 Screen Menus
Convert
This menu groups items relating to relay and DM assignments.
Device check
Checks whether or not relay and DM assignments are unique to
units.
5-30 5
UNIT EDITOR
5-7
5-3 Screen Menus
View
This menu groups items relating to functions for changing window views.
Jumps to the display position on the unit layout area of the unit
Jump 5-37
selected in the Unit configuration window.
Switches between bitmap display and box display of the units on the
Display bitmap 5-39
unit layout area.
Option
This menu groups items relating to environmental settings on Unit Editor.
5-8
5-3 Screen Menus
Window
This menu groups items relating to functions for changing the window display.
UNIT EDITOR
Unit Setup Win Selects the Unit setup window. 5-15
Message area Selects the message area. 5-15
Help
This menu displays items for displaying Help and version information.
5-9
5-4 Building Systems
5
UNIT EDITOR
5-10
5-4 Building Systems
UNIT EDITOR
5-11
5-5 Names and Functions of Screen Parts
5-12
5-5 Names and Functions of Screen Parts
System information
5
Displays the width (mm), height (mm), depth (mm), current consumption
UNIT EDITOR
(mA) and weight (g) of units in a linked connection for each stage.
Unit No.
Displays the connection No. of
the unit assigned 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and
so forth starting from the CPU.
Extension cable
Extension cables are displayed as a broken line when Extension
Unit KV-EB1 is used in a multi-stage configuration.
Unit information
Displays the model No. of placed units and assigned relay Nos.
5-13
5-5 Names and Functions of Screen Parts
5 Unit KV-EB1.
5-14
5-5 Names and Functions of Screen Parts
UNIT EDITOR
defaults.
See "Setting Currently Placed
Units" on page 5-32.
Message window
This window displays errors that occur during Unit Editor operations and the results
of conversion.
5-15
5-6 Basic Operation of Unit Editor
displayed.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + N keys.
To change the directory, click the "Set" button, select the new directory,
and click the "OK" button.
5-16
5-6 Basic Operation of Unit Editor
Other procedure
• Click {Window (W)} {Unit selection
(2)} from Menu.
• Press the Alt + 2 keys.
6 Select the unit to connect from the Unit selection window, and drag-and-
drop the unit to the unit placement area.
The unit is displayed on the edit screen. 5
UNIT EDITOR
In this example, drag-and-drop in the following order:
Power Supply Unit: KV-U7
CPU Unit: KV-700
Add-on I/O Unit (input): KV-C32XA
Add-on I/O Unit (output): KV-B16TA
Add-on I/O Unit (output): KV-B16TA
Multi-communication Unit: KV-L20
A/D Conversion unit: KV-AD40
Other procedure
Double-click the units currently displayed in the unit selection window.
[Tip]
• The CPU Unit and end unit are already placed when Unit Editor is first started
up.
• The end unit is automatically placed when the CPU Unit is placed.
[Tip]
The following describes the procedure for automatically assigning relays/DMs.
For details on manually assigned relays/DMs, see "Manually Assigning
Relays/DMs for Placed Units" (page 5-27).
5-17
5-6 Basic Operation of Unit Editor
9 Select the unit whose details are to be set on the unit placement area.
5 10 Click the "Unit setup" tab, and set the unit setting values, etc.
UNIT EDITOR
Other procedure
Double-click the unit to be set on the unit placement area.
[Tip]
For details on how to set each unit and content of settings, refer to the manual of
the respective unit.
Other procedure
Click the button.
5-18
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
UNIT EDITOR
"Placing Units" page 5-23
"Deleting Placed Units" page 5-24
• Copying/Moving Placed Units
"Copying/Moving Placed Units" page 5-25
• Assigning Relays/DMs for Placed Units
"Automatically Assigning Relays/DMs for Placed Units" page 5-26
"Manually Assigning Relays/DMs for Placed Units" page 5-27
"Batch Assigning Relay Nos. for Placed Units" page 5-28
• Checking Relay/DM Assignments
"Checking System Relay/DM Assignments" page 5-30
• Setting Currently Placed Units, Displaying Detailed Information
"Displaying Unit Detailed Settings" page 5-31
"Setting Currently Placed Units" page 5-32
• Unit Registration Wizard
"Using the Unit Registration Wizard" page 5-33
• Importing Unit Setup Information
"Importing Unit Setup Information and Unit Comments" page 5-35
• Entering Comments
"Entering Comments" page 5-36
• Reserving Units
"Reserving Units" page 5-37
• Jumping the Cursor
"Jumping the Cursor" page 5-37
"Jumping to Error Rungs" page 5-38
5-19
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
5-20
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + N keys.
5
2 Enter the name of the new project
UNIT EDITOR
and where it is to be stored, and click
the "OK" button.
To change the directory, click the "Set" button, select the new directory,
and click the "OK" button.
5-21
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
5 Other procedure
Click the button.
UNIT EDITOR
Unit setup information is required for running the KV-700. If you have exited without
saving, create the unit setup information again when you transfer the ladder
program to the CPU Unit.
Displaying Windows
Window (W) Unit configuration window (1) Alt + 1
Unit selection window (2) Alt +2
Unit setup window (3) Alt +3
Three types of windows are displayed on the right side of Unit Editor: unit
configuration window, unit selection window and unit setup window. Each of these
windows is switched and displayed by clicking the respective tabs.
[Tip]
When Unit Editor is first started up, the unit selection window is displayed.
The next time that Unit Editor is started up, the window that was currently active
when Unit Editor was last exited is memorized and displayed.
5-22
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
Other procedure
Unit configuration window
• Press the Alt + 1 keys.
• Select {Window (W)} {Unit Config Win (1)}.
Unit selection window
• Press the Alt + 2 keys.
• Select {Window (W)} {Unit Select Win (2)}.
Unit setup window
• Press the Alt + 3 keys.
• Select {Window (W)} {Unit Setup Win (3)}.
5
Placing Units
UNIT EDITOR
Place units on the unit placement area.
1 Select the unit to be connected from the unit selection window, and
drag-and-drop it to the edit window.
The unit is placed/inserted at the drag-and-drop position.
Other procedure
Place the unit at the red-framed unit cursor on the slave device placement
area.
• Select the unit to be placed on the unit selection window, and press the
key.
• Double-click the unit to be placed on the unit selection window.
Note: • When Unit Editor is first started up, the CPU Unit and end unit are
already placed.
• The Power Supply Unit can be placed at only the leftmost position.
• Only one CPU Unit is allowed per system, and can be placed at the
leftmost position of the upper row or next to the Power Supply Unit.
• Extension Unit KV-EB1 is automatically placed when each unit is placed
at positions on the lower row even if KV-EB1 is not placed.
• The end unit is automatically placed when the CPU Unit is placed, and is
automatically deleted when the CPU Unit is deleted.
• The maximum number of units that can be connected to a single system
is 16 (excluding Power Supply Unit, CPU Unit and Extension Unit) units
per horizontal gang-mounted row. Three rows are provided.
5-23
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
[Tip]
Position where Unit is Inserted by Other procedure
When a unit where the unit cursor is already located is selected, the unit is
inserted before the currently selected unit.
5
UNIT EDITOR
Other procedure
• Press the Delete key.
• Select {Edit (E)}
{Delete (D)}.
[Tip]
• To delete multiple continuous units, select the multiple units with the mouse
and then delete.
• After a unit is deleted, the other units are pushed up to fill the deleted space.
Note: If you delete the unit of a system already assigned relays/DMs, the
relay/DM Nos. of the units that were deleted from the ladder program is
displayed in red as invalid operands, and the program can no longer be
transfer to the PLC.
Either delete the invalid operand relay/DM No. in the ladder edit screen, or
edit the relay/DM Nos. If use of the automatic swap function has been set
to OFF at {Tools (T)} {Option (O)} in the ladder edit screen, the relay/DM
No. do not become invalid operands.
("Clearing Invalid Operands" page 6-143.)
5-24
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
[Tip]
When a unit is moved to a lower row for the first time, Extension Unit KV-EB1 is
automatically placed.
1 Select the unit you want to copy/move, and click with the right mouse
button.
UNIT EDITOR
Copy
• Click the button.
• Select the unit, and press the Ctrl + C keys.
• Select the unit, and press {Edit (E)} {Copy (C)}.
Move
• Click the button.
• Select the unit, and press the Ctrl + X keys.
• Select the unit, and press {Edit (E)} {Cut (T)}.
[Tip]
• To copy/move multiple continuous units, select the multiple units with the
mouse and then copy/move.
• After a unit is moved, the other units are pushed up to fill the deleted space.
Note: If you cut a unit in a system already assigned relays/DMs, the relay/DM
Nos. of the units that was cut from the ladder program is displayed in red
as invalid operands, and the program can no longer be transferred to the
PLC.
The relay/DM Nos. of the pasted unit will not be inherited even if [Paste] is
executed. Either delete the invalid operand relay/DM Nos. in the ladder edit
screen, or edit the relay/DM Nos.
("Clearing Invalid Operands" page 6-143.)
If use of the automatic swap function has been set to OFF at {Tools (T)}
{Option (O)} in the ladder edit screen, the relay/DM No. do not become
invalid operands.
5-25
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
Menu.
The relays/DMs are automatically assigned.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F5 key.
[Tip]
• KV BUILDER is provided with an "automatic replacement function" that
automatically changes the relays/DM Nos. on the ladder program when the
relays/DM Nos. of a system to which relays/DMs are already assigned are
changed.
• In the default setting, automatic replacement is enabled. To disable the
automatic replacement function, select {Tools (T)} {Option (O)} from the
ladder edit screen, and change the setting.
"Setting Device Assignments" page 5-49
• Automatic assignment rules are set in the option settings.
In the default setting, relays are set to fill the space starting from No. 30000
next to the CPU unit, and DMs are set in 100 units starting from No. 10000.
"Setting Device Assignments" page 5-49
5-26
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
Other procedure
• Press the key.
• Select {View (V)} {Unit setup (R)}. 5
• Double-click on the unit whose settings are to be
UNIT EDITOR
changed in the unit placement area.
[Tip]
• KV BUILDER is provided with an "automatic replacement function" that
automatically changes the relays/DM Nos. on the ladder program when the
relays/DM Nos. of a system to which relays/DMs are already assigned are
changed.
• In the default setting, automatic replacement is enabled. To disable the
automatic replacement function, select {Tools (T)} {Option (O)} from the
ladder edit screen, and change the setting.
"Setting Device Assignments" page 5-49
• Automatic assignment rules are set in the option settings.
In the default setting, relays are set to fill the space starting from No. 30000
next to the CPU unit, and DMs are set in 100 units starting from No. 10000.
"Setting Device Assignments" page 5-49
Note: • Enter the leading relay No. in channel units. The channel No. is the part
remaining after removing the lower two digits of the relay No.
For example, when the relay No. is 10000, the channel No. becomes
100ch.
• The leading relay or DM No. that can be assigned to each unit is defined
in Unit Editor option settings. (In the default setting, the leading relay No.
is No. 30000, the leading DM No. is No. 10000.) When a No. before the
defined relay or DM No. is defined manually, the "Relay/DM/address is in
error" dialog box is displayed, and is not accepted when "Save" or
"Device check" is selected. To change assignable leading relay or DM
Nos., set them again in the option settings.
"Setting Device Assignments" page 5-49
5-27
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
5
The Relay No. Batch Input dialog box is displayed.
UNIT EDITOR
2 Click the "Relay No." field, and enter the relay No. to be assigned in
channel units.
5-28
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
[Tip]
• KV BUILDER is provided with an "automatic replacement function" that
automatically changes the relays/DM Nos. on the ladder program when the
relays/DM Nos. of a system to which relays/DMs are already assigned are
changed.
• In the default setting, automatic replacement is enabled. To disable the
automatic replacement function, select {Tools (T)} {Option (O)} from the
ladder edit screen, and change the setting.
"Setting Device Assignments" page 5-49
• Automatic assignment rules are set in the option settings.
In the default setting, relays are set to fill the space starting from No. 30000
5
next to the CPU unit, and DMs are set in 100 units starting from No. 10000.
UNIT EDITOR
"Setting Device Assignments" page 5-49
Note: • Enter the leading relay No. in channel units. The channel No. is the part
remaining after removing the lower two digits of the relay No.
For example, when the relay No. is 10000, the channel No. becomes
100ch.
• The leading relay or DM No. that can be assigned to each unit is defined
in Unit Editor option settings. (In the default setting, the leading relay No.
is No. 30000, the leading DM No. is No. 10000.) When a No. before the
defined relay or DM No. is defined manually, the "Relay/DM/address is in
error" dialog box is displayed, and is not accepted when "Save" or
"Device check" is selected. To change assignable leading relay or DM
Nos., set them again in the option settings.
"Setting Device Assignments" page 5-49
5-29
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
This function checks whether or not there are any errors in unit placement set on
Unit Editor and in relay/DM assignments for each unit.
Check the system by the following procedure.
[Tip]
When Unit Editor is exited, devices are checked automatically. If an error is
found, a message regarding the error content is displayed.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F6 key.
Note: • Enter the leading relay No. in channel units. The channel No. is the part
remaining after removing the lower two digits of the relay No.
For example, when the relay No. is 10000, the channel No. becomes
100ch.
• The leading relay or DM No. that can be assigned to each unit is defined
in Unit Editor option settings. (In the default setting, the leading relay No.
is No. 30000, the leading DM No. is No. 10000.) When a No. before the
defined relay or DM No. is defined manually, the "Relay/DM/address is in
error" dialog box is displayed, and is not accepted when "Save" or
"Device check" is selected. To change assignable leading relay or DM
Nos., set them again in the option settings.
"Setting Device Assignments" page 5-49
5-30
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
Display the setup of the unit currently selected in the unit placement area in the unit
setup window.
5
Display the setup of the unit currently selected in the unit placement area in the unit
UNIT EDITOR
setup window by the following procedure.
Other procedure
• Press the key.
• Select {View (V)} {Unit setup (R)}.
• Double-click on the unit whose setting is to be changed in
the unit placement area.
5-31
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
5 Other procedure
UNIT EDITOR
2 Click the item whose setting is to be changed, and enter the new setting
value.
Note: Only the settings of setup items that are preceded with " " can be
changed. The settings of setup items that are preceded with " " cannot
be changed. Note, however, that the setting of some setup items can be
changed after other settings are changed.
5-32
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + W keys.
5
2 Enter system comments and block
UNIT EDITOR
comments, and click the "Next (N)"
button.
[Tip]
Up to 80 single-byte characters can be
entered for both system comments and
block comments.
Other procedure
Select the unit, and directly
enter values.
[Tip]
The CPU is specified before the
project is created.
5-33
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
Other procedure
Select the unit, and directly enter
values.
Other procedure
Select the unit, and directly enter
values.
Other procedure
Select the unit, and directly enter
values.
5-34
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
2 Specify the directory of the unit setup information file and unit comments
to import. 5
Displays the unit setup information file to be imported and
UNIT EDITOR
the directory where unit comments are saved.
2
Clicking the "View"
button displays a list
of units.
5-35
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
5
UNIT EDITOR
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + M keys.
• Select {Edit (E)} {Unit comment (M)}.
• The unit configuration window is displayed.
Select the unit to input comments to, click the
right mouse button and select [Unit comment]
from the displayed unit.
[Tip]
• Unit comments that you enter are displayed in the unit configuration window.
• Unit comments can be entered up to 80 single-byte characters.
5-36
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
5
Other procedure
UNIT EDITOR
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + R keys.
• Select {Edit (E)} {Reserve unit (R)}.
[Tip]
Two or more units can be reserved continuously by selecting with the mouse.
Other procedure
• Press the Ctrl + J keys.
• Select {View (V)} {Jump (J)}.
5-37
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
Display the unit concerned in error messages that are displayed when relays/DMs
are assigned, units are added or deleted, etc.
5
UNIT EDITOR
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F4 key.
• Double-click the selected message.
The cursor moves to the unit on the unit placement area where the error
occurred.
5-38
5-7 Unit Editor Operations
UNIT EDITOR
Switch bitmap display and box display by the following procedure.
1 To set to the box display mode, select {View (V)} {Display bitmap (B)}
from Menu.
{Display bitmap (B)} in Menu is unmarked, and the display is set to box display.
To set the bitmap display mode, select {View (V)} {Display bitmap (B)} again
from Menu. {Display bitmap (B)} in Menu is marked.
Other procedure
Click the button.
[Tip]
Settings are saved to the system, and are still active when the system is next
started up.
Other procedure
Click the button.
5-39
5-8 Using Print Functions
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + P keys.
5-40
5-8 Using Print Functions
Sample Printouts
Printout from Unit Editor
UNIT EDITOR
5-41
5-8 Using Print Functions
5
UNIT EDITOR
Executes printing.
[Tip]
Clicking the "Print" button prints out the displayed preview.
Note: Files are printed independently on Unit Editor and the Slave setup screen.
When printing the system configuration from both the Unit Editor and the
Slave setup screen, execute printing independently.
5-42
5-8 Using Print Functions
UNIT EDITOR
2 Click the "Properties" button.
The printer properties are displayed.
Note: The details displayed in the printer properties vary according to the printer
you are using.
[Tip]
For details on how to set up the printer, refer to the User's Manual for the printer.
5-43
5-9 Environmental Settings
• Print settings
After you have changed the settings, the new settings are saved to KV BUILDER,
and are reflected in Unit Editor environmental settings when KV BUILDER is next
started up.
Some of the setting items are reflected in the Unit Editor environmental settings
immediately after their settings are changed.
Display the Option Setup dialog box and change each of the setting items by the
following procedure.
5-44
5-9 Environmental Settings
Setting View
The following operations can be performed on the [Display setup] tab:
[Tip]
This tab is already selected when the Option Setup dialog box is first selected.
UNIT EDITOR
Changing the Unit Display Scale
Change the display scale of the units displayed in the unit placement area.
Default is 100%.
Change the display scale of the unit by the following procedure.
5-45
5-9 Environmental Settings
Clicking here
5 increases/decreases the display
font size (numerical value).
UNIT EDITOR
5-46
5-9 Environmental Settings
UNIT EDITOR
Move the cursor one system at a time by the following procedure.
5-47
5-9 Environmental Settings
Setting Color
The following operation can be performed on the [Color setting] tab:
1
Select the radio button of the
text color or the background
color to be changed.
[Tip]
The details of the new setting are reflected in all files.
5-48
5-9 Environmental Settings
UNIT EDITOR
preceding already defined relay and DM Nos. are assigned manually, the
"Relay/DM/address is in error" dialog box is displayed when "Save and Exit" or
"Device Check" is selected, and the selected No. is not accepted. To change the
start relay or DM No., set the setting again.
1 Set the start relay No. when devices are assigned automatically.
1
Select the batch setting or
individual setting radio
button. 2
Enter the start relay No.
[Tip]
By the batch setup, relays are assigned pushed up in order from the side of the
CPU unit. By individual setup, relays are assigned pushed up in order from the
side of the CPU unit for each unit type (input, output, special etc.).
5-49
5-9 Environmental Settings
DM (KV)
Set the rules when DM devices on the KV-700 are automatically assigned. The start
relay and DM Nos. set here are also enabled in the manual setup. When Nos.
preceding already defined relay and DM Nos. are assigned manually, the
"Relay/DM/address is in error" dialog box is displayed when "Save and Exit" or
"Device Check" is selected, and the selected No. is not accepted. To change the
start relay or DM No., set the setting again.
5
UNIT EDITOR
2
1 Enter the start DM No.
Mark the checkbox when
assigning DM to units in 100
increments.
5-50
5-9 Environmental Settings
• Changing the display color of units placed in the box display mode
Changing the Display Color of Units Placed in the Box Display Mode 5
Set the display color of placed units when the display mode of units placed in the
UNIT EDITOR
unit placement area is set to the box display mode.
1
Select the unit to be
changed. Displays the color according
to the value entered in 2.
2
Enter the color to be created
as RGB values. Enter each
color using the bar or Hex
values. The color is
previewed in the frame on
the right. Returns the item selected in
1 to the default color.
[Tip]
• Details set here are reflected only in the project currently being edited.
• The colors set here become the color of the relay and DM No. displays of that
unit in the ladder diagram.
5-51
5-9 Environmental Settings
Other Settings
The following operations can be performed on the [Other settings] tab:
5-52
5-9 Environmental Settings
UNIT EDITOR
5-53
5-9 Environmental Settings
5
1 Unmark the [Display confirmation message when address auto-assign is
UNIT EDITOR
execuled] checkbox.
5-54
5-9 Environmental Settings
UNIT EDITOR
Marking this check box enables
the auto-layout function.
5-55
Chapter 6
EDITOR
This chapter describes how to edit ladder programs using the Editor, and how
to convert ladder programs.
Editor is for making ladder programs. As well as allowing you to input instructions
and register comments, it allows you to perform various editing operations.
6-2
6-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions
Standard
The tool bar groups together functions provided as standard in the Windows
operating system.
It is used for managing and printing files, cutting and pasting information, and
displaying Help.
Save ladder diagram Overwrites and saves the ladder program currently being edited. 6-34
EDITOR
Print preview Displays a preview of the printer ladder program. 6-162
6-3
6-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions
Edit
This tool bar groups together auxiliary functions used for making ladder programs.
It also allows you to undo/redo operations, display and edit comments, and find
information.
Undo Cancels the previous operation to restore the previous state. 6-83
Opens the Edit Comment dialog box and enables entry of device
Edit comment/label 6-103
comments.
Multi comment Opens the multi comment window, and writes the device comments.
6-111
window This enables you to edit comments while editing ladders.
Edit rung comment Writes the rung comment to the current cursor position. 6-118
Display/hide
6 comment
Switches display/hide of device comments on ladder diagram. 6-25
Search Opens the Search dialog box for searching for devices. 6-130
EDITOR
Display error Re-displays the content of the errors that occurred at conversion. 6-142
Converts the ladder program currently being edited, and transfers it
Transfer to PLC 7-40
to the KV.
Read from PLC Reads ladder programs from KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700. 7-41
Reads ladder programs from KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 for
PLC monitor 7-39
monitoring.
Converts the ladder program currently being edited, and moves to
Simulator 8-14
the Simulator screen.
6-4
6-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions
Display
This tool bar groups together functions for setting how screens are displayed.
Instruction palette 6
This tool bar groups together the instruction palette for freely pasting instructions to
ladder diagrams, and CPU built-in positioning functions.
EDITOR
Important: "Edit CPU positioning parameters" and "Display/hide CPU positioning
instruction tool bar" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M"
is selected at the PLC type setting.
6-5
6-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions
Add-ins
This tool bar groups together tools for starting up the system setup software for
using KV-700 and the various special unit setup software.
Important: • This tool bar can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is
selected at the PLC type setting.
Instructions 1
This tool bar groups together the basic instructions used on KV-10/16/24/40, KV-
700.
Enter NO contact
Enters NO contact OR. 6-59
OR
Enter NC contact
Enters NC contact OR. 6-59
OR
Enter coil Enters the OUT instruction (output coil). 6-61
Enter NC contact
Enters the OUB instruction (output reversed coil). 6-61
coil
Enter vertical
Enters a vertical connecting line. 6-78
connecting line
Delete vertical
Deletes a vertical connecting line. 6-80
connecting line
Enter horizontal
Enters a horizontal connecting line. 6-78
connecting line
Delete horizontal
Deletes a horizontal connecting line. 6-80
connecting line
6-6
6-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions
Instructions 2
This tool bar groups together additional instructions used on KV-10/16/24/40, KV-
700.
Important: "LDP" and "MOV" instructions can be used only when "KV-700" or
"KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.
EDITOR
DIFU Enters the DIFU (up differential) instruction. 6-67
Important: • To display the CPU positioning instruction tool bar, click the
"Display/hide CPU positioning instruction tool bar" icon .
• "CPU positioning instructions" can be used only when "KV-700" or
"KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.
6-7
6-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions
Suffix
This tool bar groups together tools for setting the radix of the data used in applied
and arithmetic operation instructions, and for setting the default format for the data
length.
Default suffix Sets the radix of the default when instructions are entered. 6-75
6
EDITOR
6-8
6-3 Outline of Menu Functions
File
This menu groups together file operation and printing related items.
EDITOR
Important: "Read Memory Card," "Write Memory Card" and "Output unit
specification CSV file" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-
700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.
6-9
6-3 Outline of Menu Functions
Edit
This menu groups together items used when making ladder programs.
6
EDITOR
Important: "LDP" and "MOV" instructions can be used only when "KV-700" or
"KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.
6-10
6-3 Outline of Menu Functions
JOGY
ORGX
Enters the JOGY (Y-axis jog operation) instruction.
Enters the ORGX (X-axis zero return) instruction.
6-71
6-71
6
ORGY Enters the ORGY (Y-axis zero return) instruction. 6-71
EDITOR
TCHX Enters the TCHX (X-axis point teaching) instruction. 6-71
TCHY Enters the TCHY (Y-axis point teaching) instruction. 6-71
Changes the device for the instruction at the cursor position. 6-45
Instruction palette/Change operand If there is no device at the cursor position, the instruction 6-50
palette is displayed. 6-76
Cut Cuts the selected range. 6-90
Copy Copies the selected range. 6-90
Paste Pastes cut data to the cursor position. 6-91
Insert loopback ladder Automatically loopbacks the ladder from the cursor position. 1-19
Insert free rung Inserts a free rung at the cursor position. 6-93
Delete rung Deletes the rung at the cursor position. 6-94
6-78
Edit connecting line Switches to the connecting line edit mode.
6-80
Edit list Enters ladder programs in mnemonic format in block units. 6-84
6-11
6-3 Outline of Menu Functions
Comment
This menu groups together items for editing device comments and rung comments,
and items for setting transfer to KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700.
Opens the multi comment window, and writes the device comments. This
Multi comment window 6-111
enables you to edit comments while editing ladders.
Edit rung comment Writes a rung comment to the current cursor position. 6-118
Rung Set Sets rung comment conversion. 6-119
comment
conversion Release Cancels rung comment conversion. 6-119
6-12
6-3 Outline of Menu Functions
EDITOR
Item Function See page
Rung/step No. Jumps to the specified rung or step. 6-122
Top Jumps to the start rung of the ladder program. 6-123
End Jumps to the end rung of the ladder program. 6-123
Registered rung Jumps to the registered rung. 6-123
Register rung Registers the rung at the current cursor position as the jump destination. 6-123
Previous block Jumps to the circuit block before the current cursor position. 6-126
Next block Jumps to the circuit block following the current cursor position. 6-126
Jump
Previous symbol Jumps to the symbol before the current cursor position. 6-127
Next symbol Jumps to the symbol following the current cursor position. 6-127
Top of rung Jumps to the start of the rung at the current cursor position. 6-128
End of rung Jumps to the end of the rung at the current cursor position. 6-128
Change: Jumps to the previous program change block from the current cursor
6-129
Prev block position.
Change:
Jumps to the next program change block from the current cursor position. 6-129
Next block
Find Opens the Search dialog box to search for devices. 6-130
Replace operand Replaces devices such as relay Nos. 6-132
Replace range Replaces devices such as relay Nos. in an area selected by the cursor. 6-134
Converts the LD instruction on the ladder program currently being edited to
NO/NC 6-136
the LDB instruction, and vice versa.
Displays the device used/unused list for devices on the ladder program
Use status 6-137
currently being edited.
6-13
6-3 Outline of Menu Functions
Monitors/Simulator
This menu groups together items Monitors, Simulator and communications related
items.
Important: "Unit No. setup", "Modem setup", "PC modem setup", "KV-L20
modem setup", "Ethernet settings", "1 USB port", "2 Serial port", "3
6 Modem mode", "4 Ethernet port" and "Password setup" can be used
only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type
setting.
EDITOR
Unit No. setup Specifies the unit No. of the communications destination KV-L20. 7-22
PC modem Sets the modem currently connected to the personal computer in the
7-23
setup modem communications mode.
Modem
setup KV-L20
Sets the modem currently connected to the KV-L20 in the modem
modem 7-26
communications mode.
setup
Sets details when performing communications with KV-700 over
Ethernet settings 7-32
Ethernet.
1 USB port Communications with the KV-700 is performed using the USB port. 7-20
2 Serial port Communications with the KV-700 is performed using the serial port. 7-20
3 Modem mode Communications with the KV-700 is performed using a modem. 7-28
4 Ethernet port Communications with the KV-700 is performed over Ethernet. 7-20
Reads ladder programs from the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 for
PLC Monitor 7-39
monitoring.
Converts ladder programs currently being edited, and moves them to
Convert→ Move → Monitor 7-40
the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700.
Read program from PLC Reads ladder programs from the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700. 7-41
Verifies ladder programs in the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 with ladder
Verify with PLC program 7-42
programs currently being edited.
Password setup Sets a password to ladder programs currently being edited. 6-146
Edit offline device Edits device values in an offline state. 7-43
Converts ladder programs currently being edited, and moves to the
Simulator 8-14
simulator screen.
6-14
6-3 Outline of Menu Functions
Convert
This menu groups together items relating to ladder conversion and checking of
errors.
Important: "Clear invalid operands" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-
700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.
6
View
EDITOR
This menu groups together items used when making ladder programs.
Important: "Add-in", "Suffix", "Device for unit" and "Clear back color of changes"
can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is selected at the
PLC type setting.
6-15
6-3 Outline of Menu Functions
Tools
This menu groups together environment setup items when making ladder programs
and respective setup software.
6
EDITOR
6-16
6-3 Outline of Menu Functions
Window
This menu groups together items relating to display of ladder windows.
EDITOR
Help
This menu groups together how to operate KV BUILDER and how to use instruction.
6-17
6-4 About the Edit Screen
[Tip]
When the auto-reading function is set, currently set files are automatically read
and displayed when Editor is started up.
"Setting Auto-reading of Files" page 6-31
6
EDITOR
Toolbar
The toolbar contains buttons for
executing instructions.
Clicking a button executes the
instruction.
Main window
This is the entire Editor screen.
6-18
6-4 About the Edit Screen
Rung No.
This is the No. of the rung in the ladder diagram.
Instruction symbol
Symbol of instruction
Step No.
This is the step No. of the ladder diagram.
The step No. is displayed only after program
conversion, and display disappears when the
ladder diagram is modified.
Title bar 6
Displays the name of the file being edited.
EDITOR
Connecting line
Cursor
Select devices and other
elements. The cursor
moves to the left, right, top
and bottom.
6-19
6-4 About the Edit Screen
Contact
Rung No.
Step No.
Scroll bar
Cursor
• To view parts of the window hidden from view, use the scroll bar or
keys.
Cursor movement
key: Moves the cursor.
PageUp PageDown key: Moves the cursor one page (screen) at a time.
6 Ctrl+ key: Moves the cursor one block at a time.
+ Tab key:
Shift Moves the cursor to the previous symbol.
EDITOR
Note: When the mouse cursor is displayed as , the window size merely
changes and cannot be set to a split screen.
[Tip]
Two split screens can be scrolled interlocked with each other. This is handy
when displaying a long ladder diagram in a single operation.
Select {Tool (T)} {Link both screens (D)} from Menu to mark this menu item.
6-20
6-4 About the Edit Screen
• Click the title bar of the window you want to set as the current window.
• All opened windows are displayed when {Window (W)} is selected from
Menu. In this state, select the title of the window you want to set as the
current window.
EDITOR
6-21
6-5 View Modes
There are five ways of changing the size at which ladder diagrams are viewed.
When Editor is first started up, the view size is 100%.
Change the view size by the following procedure.
The view size can also be changed in the Change View Mode dialog box.
Other procedure
Reducing the view size
Press the Ctrl + PageUp keys.
Enlarging the view size
Press the Ctrl + PageDown keys.
Other procedure
Click the button.
6-22
6-5 View Modes
2 Set the various items referring to the table below, and click the "OK"
button.
To disable the settings and close the dialog box, click the "Cancel" button.
EDITOR
Displays at twice (largest view size) the standard size. Select this setting
200%
when text is small and difficult to read.
150% Displays at 1.5 times the standard size.
120% Displays at 1.2 times the standard size.
View size
100% (std) Standard size
Smallest view size. Select this setting to check overall movement when the
80% number of cells that can be displayed in a single screen increases to the
maximum number.
XYM Displays the device name of the ladder diagram by XYM.
Signed decimal constants Displays decimal constants as signed constants in ladder diagrams.
Device label Displays the label name of each device in the ladder diagram.
Comment Displays comments in the ladder diagram.
Grid Displays the grid lines of cells in the edit screen.
Devices for units Displays device names in the ladder program by device for unit annotation.
Displays CM without displaying pack instructions when extending pack
Device annotation at pack inst.
instructions.
Comment 1 Displays comment 1.
Comment
Comment 2 Displays comment 2.
type
Comment 3 Displays comment 3.
Editing screen Reflects settings on edit screen of current window.
Mode Browse screen Reflects settings on verify screen of current window.
setup
range Both Reflects settings on both edit screen and verify screen of current window.
All windows Reflects settings on all windows.
* "Current window" refers to the currently selected active window.
6-23
6-5 View Modes
Display the device name of symbols on Unit Editor expressed as devices for units
by the following procedure.
"Expressing devices for units" refers to expression of relays assigned in Unit Editor
as the "nth terminal of the nth connected unit."
For example, the 5th input relay No. at the input unit next to the CPU is expressed
as "0001-0005" and the 31st relay No. of the 3rd output unit from the CPU is
expressed as "03-00115".
00000
The device name of symbols on Unit Editor are expressed as devices for units by
the following procedure.
Other procedure
Press the Shift + (Space) keys.
6-24
6-5 View Modes
button
Other procedure
EDITOR
Displaying Labels
View (V) Label (L) Ctrl + Backspace
Display labels instead of device names for symbols on Editor.
Display labels by the following procedure.
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + Backspace keys.
[Tip]
Labels can be used instead of device names when inputting symbols or
finding/replacing symbols. For example, devices names can be written as
follows when the label "SW1" is assigned to device 0000:
6-25
6-5 View Modes
Tool bar
6
EDITOR
Toggle between display and hiding of tool bars/status bar by the following
procedure.
1 Select {View (V)} from Menu, and select the desired display setting.
Marked: Display
Unmarked: Hide
[Tip]
• To display more detailed types of tool bars, select {Tool bar (T)}.
• As the default setting, all items other than "CPU positioning instructions" are
marked. Each click of an item toggles between display and hide.
6-26
6-6 File Management
EDITOR
"OK" button.
To change the directory, click the "Set" button, select the new directory,
and click the "OK" button.
If the "Reg special dev" checkbox is marked, the contact comments of special
devices such as CR and CM are automatically registered.
6-27
6-6 File Management
• The name of the ladder program that is displayed is the same as the name of
the project folder.
• When "KV-700" or "KV-700+M are selected as the PLC type, the
confirmation box for starting up Unit Editor is displayed. Click the "Yes"
button.
6
EDITOR
Note: Before exiting editing of a ladder program, be sure to save any edits to file.
[Tip]
The following shows PLC type settings and corresponding models.
• KV-700: Select this to use the KV-700.
• KV-700+M: Select this to use a KV-700 with extended memory (OP-
42138).
• KV-10(16)A/D: Select this to use KV-10AR/AT/ATP, KV-10DR/DT, KV-
16AR/AT/ATP or KV-16DR/DT.
• KV-24(40)A/D: Select this to use KV-24AR/AT/ATP, KV-24DR/DT, KV-
40AR/AT/ATP or KV-40DR/DT.
6-28
6-6 File Management
Note: • The PLC type for ladder programs created for KV-10/16/24/40 cannot be
changed for use on the KV-700.
• To use ladder programs created for KV-10/16/24/40 on KV-700, use the
KV→KV-700 conversion function.
EDITOR
The following shows PLC type settings and corresponding models.
• KV-700: Select this to use the KV-700.
• KV-700+M: Select this to use a KV-700 with extended memory (OP-
42138).
• KV-10(16)A/D: Select this to use KV-10AR/AT/ATP, KV-10DR/DT, KV-
16AR/AT/ATP or KV-16DR/DT.
• KV-24(40)A/D: Select this to use KV-24AR/AT/ATP, KV-24DR/DT, KV-
40AR/AT/ATP or KV-40DR/DT.
If the type of connected PLC is not correctly set, the error message "Wrong PLC
type code" is displayed during communications with the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700,
preventing the ladder programs from being transferred to the PLC or preventing use
of monitor functions. Incorrect setting of the PLC type also causes the PLC to
malfunction.
[Tip]
When the PLC type is set to "KV-10(16)A/D", "KV-24(40)A/D", the ladder
program data that you have made can be shared on LADDER BUILDER for KV.
6-29
6-6 File Management
6
EDITOR
6-30
6-6 File Management
[Tip]
• This feature is useful for always reading the same files.
• Up to 16 files can be set to be automatically read.
EDITOR
program must first be saved to
file.
[Tip]
Up to 16 files can be set to be automatically read. If more than 16 files are set,
the message "Cannot set any more." is displayed. You can cancel auto-read
setting of files to which auto-read is already set so that new files can be set for
automatic reading.
6-31
6-6 File Management
When auto-save is set, files are automatically backed up at the preset time intervals.
Important: Auto-backup files are saved only for use at the next startup when KV
BUILDER ends in error. The backup file will be lost if you exit KV
BUILDER without using "Save as" to save the auto-backup file.
[Tip]
The following illustrates how auto-save works.
6-32
6-6 File Management
EDITOR
2 Mark the [Autosave] checkbox, and enter the auto-save interval.
[Tip]
Auto-save files are appended with the ".$dc" extender, and are generated inside
the project folder containing the ladder program currently being edited.
6-33
6-6 File Management
Save ladder: Overwrites the ladder program currently being edited under the same
name.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
Save ladder as: Saves the ladder program currently being edited under a different
name.
6-34
6-6 File Management
EDITOR
The Change PLC Type dialog box is displayed.
[Tip]
• Project folders cannot be saved under the same name
as an already created project. If you enter the project
using the same name, the message "That project
already exists." is displayed and the project is not
created.
• To overwrite the project using an already entered project name, delete the old
project folder before executing "Save ladder as."
"Deleting project folders" page 6-37
6-35
6-6 File Management
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + O keys.
setting is "Project".
[Tip]
You can also specify ladder programs by entering the file name or by selecting
with the mouse from the list of files.
Note: • Ladder programs for KV-700 cannot be read when ladder programs for
KV-10/16/24/40 are displayed.
• Ladder programs for KV-10/16/24/40 cannot be read when ladder
programs for KV-700 are displayed.
• To read a ladder program for a different PLC type, first close the ladder
program currently displayed in the ladder program window, then read the
ladder program for the different PLC type.
6-36
6-6 File Management
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + N keys.
EDITOR
program to be deleted is
saved. The default
setting is "Project".
6-37
6-6 File Management
Note: This menu item is not displayed unless the ladder program window is
displayed.
Look in (I) Specify the project folder to save the mnemonic list to.
File name (N) Enter the name of the mnemonic list.
Files of type (T) Specify "Mnemonic file(*.mnm)".
[Tip]
The file is automatically appended with the extender ".mnm" when the file name
is set even if it is not specified when the file name is entered.
6-38
6-6 File Management
4 Select the comment to append to the list from the Select Comment Type
dialog box.
EDITOR
1 Select {File (F)} {Read Mnemonic List (I)}.
The confirmation dialog box is displayed.
• This menu item is not displayed unless the ladder program window is displayed.
• When a mnemonic list is read, it is read to the ladder program currently being
edited. For this reason, the ladder program is lost. If you need the ladder
program, either save the ladder program under a new name, or create a new
folder and read the mnemonic list to the new folder before you read the
mnemonic list.
"Saving, Reading and Deleting Files" page 6-34
"Creating New Projects" page 6-27
6-39
6-6 File Management
Look in (I) Specify the project folder to read the mnemonic list to.
File name (N) Enter the name of the mnemonic list.
Files of type (T) Specify "Mnemonic file(*.mnm)".
6
4 Click the "Open" button.
EDITOR
6-40
6-6 File Management
EDITOR
Specify the directory to
save the CSV file to.
Save in (I) Specify the location to save the CSV file to.
File name (N) Enter the name of the CSV file.
Save as type (T) Specify the "CSV file(*.csv)".
Sample printout
6-41
6-6 File Management
Verifying Files
File (F) File-file verify (F)
Verify the contents of the ladder program currently being edited against the contents
of a saved ladder program file.
Verify the contents of the ladder program by the following procedure.
[Tip]
You can also specify ladder programs by entering file name or by selecting with
the mouse from the list of files.
[Tip]
Ladder program files are verified by mnemonics. Verification errors are
sometimes output even in programs that perform the same operation.
6-42
6-6 File Management
5 If you select the error from the error list, and click the "Jump" button, the
display jumps to the difference that you selected. To close the Error
Display dialog box, click the "Close" button.
[Tip] 6
To redisplay a closed Error Display dialog box, click the button.
EDITOR
6-43
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
Entering Instructions
Ladder symbols are automatically entered when an instruction is specified.
There are four ways of entering instructions.
6
EDITOR
6-44
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
• By entering the initial letter of the instruction, and directly entering the
instruction by a mnemonic from the dialog box that is displayed
"Directly entering instructions by mnemonic" page 6-56
EDITOR
Entering instructions from the instruction palette・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
View (V) Instruction palette (H)
Enter instructions from the instruction palette.
Symbols that are actually displayed can be entered to the ladder diagram by
dragging-and-dropping them from the Instruction Pallet window. This allows you to
enter instructions as if you are drawing a ladder diagram.
1 Move the cursor to the cell on the ladder program that you want to enter
an instruction to, and double-click that cell.
Double-click
Other procedure
• Select {View (V)} {Instruction Palette (H)} from Menu in that order.
• Select {Edit (E)} {Change Operand/Instruction Palette (W)} from Menu in
that order.
• Click the button.
• Select a cell on the ladder diagram that does not contain an instruction, and
press the key.
[Tip]
• Ladder programs can be made with the instruction palette displayed at all
times.
• If you select a cell containing an instruction, and press the key, the Change
Operand dialog box is displayed.
"Changing Operands" page 6-76
• If you are not yet accustomed to creating ladder programs or programming
instructions, you can perform these operations reliably without any mistakes if
you enter using the Instruction Pallet window.
6-45
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
6
EDITOR
6-46
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
[Tip]
• "Suffix/derivative" can be set when an instruction that can be set is selected. If
an instruction that cannot be set is selected, "Suffix/derivative" are displayed in
gray and cannot be set. The default suffix is "U". This default can be changed
by specifying the default suffix.
"Specifying the Default Suffix" page 6-75
• Types of instructions and actual instructions provided on KV-700
EDITOR
ENDH
SFT, MEMSW, STP, STE, STG, JMP, ENDS,
Applied instruction W-ON, W-OFF, W-UE, WDE, MC, MCR,
CALL, SBN, RET, FOR, NEXT, BREAK
DW, LDA, STA, TMIN, MOV, BMOV, FMOV, @DW, @LDA, @STA, @TMIN, @MOV,
ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, INC, DEC, ROOT, @BMOV, @FMOV, @ADD, @SUB,
CMP, ZCMP, ANDA, ORA, EORA, COM, @MUL, @DIV, @INC, @DEC, @ROOT,
NEG, SRA, SLA, RRA, RLA, WSR, WSL, @CMP, @ZCMP, @ANDA, @ORA,
TBCD, TBIN, MPX, DMX, GRY, RGRY, @EORA, @COM, @NEG, @SRA, @SLA,
DISN, UNIN, DISB, UNIB, SWAP, XCH, @RRA, @RLA, @WSR, @WSL, @TBCD,
FLOAT, INTG, DISF, UNIF, EXP, LOG, RAD, @TBIN, @MPX, @DMX, @GRY, @RGRY,
Operation instruction DEG, SIN, COS, TAN, ASIN, ACOS, ATAN, @DISN, @UNIN, @DISB, @UNIB,
ASC, RASC, DASC, RDASC, SMOV, SADD, @SWAP, @XCH, @FLOAT, @INTG,
SCMP, DISS, UNIS, LEN, RCOM @DISF, @UNIF, @EXP, @LOG, @RAD,
@DEG, @SIN, @COS, @TAN, @ASIN,
@ACOS, @ATAN, @ASC, @RASC,
@DASC, @RDASC, @SMOV, @SADD,
@SCMP, @DISS, @UNIS, @LEN,
@RCOM
HKEY, BCNT, DCNT, SER, MAX, MIN, AVG,
ZRES, FIFOW, FIFOR, EXT, WTIME, SEC,
Extended instruction RSEC, AJST, ARES, ACLR, HSP, DI, EI,
INT, RETI, CTH, CTC, PLSX, PLSY, JOGX,
JOGY, ORGX, ORGY, TCHX, TCHY
6-47
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
6 • Data memory and internal register values are handled as follows according to
suffix:
EDITOR
Note: Suffixes are not provided for KV-10/16/24/40. The suffix function is
available only for the KV-700.
6-48
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
EDITOR
3Select the mnemonic for
the instruction to enter
from the [Mnemonic]
pulldown menu. Also, an
explanation of the selected
instruction is displayed on
4You can also enter operands by clicking the the operand guide below.
"No.2 operand" or "No.3 operand" button
according to the specified instruction, and
repeating steps 2 and 3.
[Tip]
"Type" and "Value" can be entered directly from the keyboard. Before you
directly enter type and value from the keyboard, change the setting of the
Windows Japanese FEP (front end processor) to enable entry of single-byte
alphanumeric characters.
6-49
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
4 Drag-and-drop the
symbol selected in step
2 at the desired location
where you want to place
the instruction.
This enters the symbol.
Other procedure
Click the "OK" button or "Wr" or "Insert (I)" button.
position will be
Overwrites the symbol at the cursor position. overwritten.
[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button or "Wr" or "Insert (I)" buttons without specifying the
operand, the unspecified operand is indicated as "???". This is handy if you want
to prepare only the ladder circuit in advance when relay assignments are not
fixed.
???
C000 When the No.3 operand is not specified in the C instruction:
0001
1 Move the cursor to the cell on the ladder program that you want to enter
an instruction to, and double-click that cell.
Double-click
Other procedure
• Select {View (V)} {Instruction Palette (H)} from Menu in that order.
• Select {Edit (E)} {Instruction palette/Change operand (W)} from Menu in
that order.
• Click the button.
• Select a cell on the ladder diagram that does not contain an instruction, and
press the key.
6-50
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
[Tip]
• Ladder programs can be made with the instruction palette displayed at all
times.
• To display the Change Operand dialog box, select a cell containing an
instruction, and press the key.
"Changing Operands" page 6-76
• If you are not yet accustomed to creating ladder programs or programming
instructions, you can perform these operations reliably without any mistakes if
you enter in the Instruction Pallet window.
6
2Click the mnemonic to
EDITOR
reflect the selected
mnemonic in the content
on the right side of the
Instruction Pallet window.
Also, an explanation of the
selected instruction
displayed in the instruction
guide.
1Click to display
the lower layer.
[Tip]
• "Suffix/derivative" can be set when an available instruction is selected. If an
instruction that is not available is selected, "Suffix/derivative" are displayed in
gray and cannot be set. The default suffix is "U". This default can be changed
by specifying the default suffix.
"Specifying the Default Suffix" page 6-75
• The instruction list is organized in the following tree hierarchy:
6-51
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
DISN, UNIN, DISB, UNIB, SWAP, XCH, @RRA, @RLA, @WSR, @WSL, @TBCD,
FLOAT, INTG, DISF, UNIF, EXP, LOG, RAD, @TBIN, @MPX, @DMX, @GRY, @RGRY,
Operation instruction DEG, SIN, COS, TAN, ASIN, ACOS, ATAN, @DISN, @UNIN, @DISB, @UNIB,
ASC, RASC, DASC, RDASC, SMOV, SADD, @SWAP, @XCH, @FLOAT, @INTG,
SCMP, DISS, UNIS, LEN, RCOM @DISF, @UNIF, @EXP, @LOG, @RAD,
@DEG, @SIN, @COS, @TAN, @ASIN,
@ACOS, @ATAN, @ASC, @RASC,
@DASC, @RDASC, @SMOV, @SADD,
@SCMP, @DISS, @UNIS, @LEN,
@RCOM
HKEY, BCNT, DCNT, SER, MAX, MIN, AVG,
ZRES, FIFOW, FIFOR, EXT, WTIME, SEC,
Extended instruction RSEC, AJST, ARES, ACLR, HSP, DI, EI,
INT, RETI, CTH, CTC, PLSX, PLSY, JOGX,
JOGY, ORGX, ORGY, TCHX, TCHY
6-52
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
• Data memory and internal register values are handled as follows according to 6
suffix:
EDITOR
.U Values are handled as 16-bit (0 to 65535)
unsigned binary data.
.S Values are handled as 16-bit (-32768 to 32767)
signed binary data.
.D Values are handled as 32-bit (0 to 4294967295)
unsigned binary data.
.L Values are handled as 32-bit (-2147483648 to 2147483647)
signed binary data.
.F Values are handled as floating -3.4E38 ≤ n ≤ -1.4E-45
point type real number data. n=0
1.4E-45 ≤ n ≤ 3.4E38
(number of effective digits: 7)
Other procedure
You can enter instructions by selecting the group of instructions from the group
radio button to the right of the [Instruction Palette], and selecting the required
instruction from the [Instruction Type] or [Mnemonic] pulldown list.
6-53
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
Note: Suffixes are not provided for KV-10/16/24/40. The suffix function is
available only for the KV-700.
operand is displayed on
the operand guide below.
[Tip]
"Type" and "Value" can be entered directly from the keyboard. Before you
directly enter type and value from the keyboard, change the setting of the
Windows Japanese FEP (front end processor) to enable entry of single-byte
alphanumeric characters.
6-54
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
6
4 Click the "OK" button or "Wr" or "Insert (I)" button.
EDITOR
This enters the symbol.
Inserts the symbol at the cursor Enters the symbol at
position. the cursor position,
and close the
instruction palette.
Discards the settings, and closes
The symbol already
the Instruction Palette window.
entered at the cursor
position will be
Overwrites the symbol at the cursor position. overwritten.
[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button or "Wr" or "Insert (I)" button without specifying the
operand, the unspecified operand is indicated as "???". This is handy if you want
to prepare only the ladder circuit in advance when relay assignments are not
fixed.
???
C000 When the No.3 operand is not specified in the C instruction:
0001
6-55
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
order.
• Select a cell on the ladder program that you want to enter an instruction to,
and enter the initial letter of the required instruction.
• Select the cell on the ladder program to enter the instruction to, and press
the Esc key.
[Tip]
The following table shows how instructions can be abbreviated.
Instruction Text String Abbreviations
LD, AND A, X
LDB, ANDB B, LDI, LDNOT, ANI, ANDNOT
ORB ORI, ORNOT
6-56
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
EDITOR
INT I
W-UE WUE, WU
W-DE WDE, WD
W-ON WON
W-OFF WOFF
ADD +
SUB −
MUL *
6-57
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
Here you can enter device comments for Enters the instruction at the cursor position. The instruction
the operands of entered instructions. already entered at the cursor position will be overwritten.
[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button or "Ins (I)" button without specifying the operand, the
unspecified operand is indicated as "???".
6 ???
C000
When the No.2 and No.3 operands are not
specified in the C instruction:
???
EDITOR
1 Move the cursor to the instruction to be changed, and press the Esc key.
6-58
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
EDITOR
to enter from the sub-menu.
The Change Operand dialog box is displayed.
Other procedure
Instructions can also be entered by the following procedure.
6-59
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
[Tip]
"Type" and "Value" can be entered directly from the keyboard.
Discards the settings, and closes the Change Operand dialog box.
[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button without specifying the operand, the unspecified
operand is indicated as "???". This is handy if you want to prepare only the
ladder circuit in advance when relay assignments are not fixed.
???
When the No.1 operand is not specified in the LD instruction:
6-60
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
EDITOR
Other procedure
Coils can also be entered by the following procedure.
6-61
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
Discards the settings, and closes the Change Operand dialog box.
[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button without specifying the operand, the unspecified
operand is indicated as "???". This is handy if you want to prepare only the
ladder circuit in advance when relay assignments are not fixed.
???
When the No.1 operand is not specified in the OUT instruction:
6-62
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
Other procedure 6
Instructions can also be entered by the following procedure.
EDITOR
3 Specify the operand.
Click the "No.1 operand" button, and enter the operand valid for the instruction
that you specified.
Enter the device type at "Type" and numerical value at "Value".
[Tip]
"Type" and "Value" can be entered directly from the keyboard.
6-63
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
Discards the settings, and closes the Change Operand dialog box.
[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button without specifying the operand, the unspecified
operand is indicated as "???". This is handy if you want to prepare only the
ladder circuit in advance when relay assignments are not fixed.
???
( SET ) When the No.1 operand is not specified in the SET instruction:
6-64
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
6
Other procedure
EDITOR
Instructions can also be entered by the following procedure.
[Tip]
"Type" and "Value" can be entered directly from the keyboard.
6-65
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
Discards the settings, and closes the Change Operand dialog box.
[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button without specifying the operand, the unspecified
operand is indicated as "???". This is handy if you want to prepare only the
ladder circuit in advance when relay assignments are not fixed.
???
T000 When the No.2 operand is not specified in the TMR instruction:
6-66
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
Note: "LDP" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is selected at the
PLC type setting.
2 Select {Edit (E)} {Instruction input 2 (2)}, and select the instruction
from the sub-menu.
6
The Change Device dialog box is displayed.
EDITOR
Other procedure
Instructions can also be entered by the following procedure.
6-67
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
[Tip]
"Type" and "Value" can be entered directly from the keyboard.
Discards the settings, and closes the Change Operand dialog box.
[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button without specifying the operand, the unspecified
operand is indicated as "???". This is handy if you want to prepare only the
ladder circuit in advance when relay assignments are not fixed.
???
DIFU When the No.1 operand is not specified in the DIFU instruction:
6-68
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
MOV
Edit (E) Instruction input 2 (2) MOV (0) Alt + F10
Note: "MOV" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is selected at the
PLC type setting.
2 Select {Edit (E)} {Instruction input 2 (2)}, and select the instruction
from the sub-menu. 6
The Change Operand dialog box is displayed.
EDITOR
Other procedure
Instructions can also be entered by the following procedure.
6-69
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
[Tip]
"Type" and "Value" can be entered directly from the keyboard.
4 For the MOV instruction, click the "No.2 operand" button and
repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the operand.
6-70
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
Discards the settings, and closes the Change Operand dialog box.
[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button without specifying the operand, the unspecified
operand is indicated as "???". This is handy if you want to prepare only the
ladder circuit in advance when relay assignments are not fixed.
MOV
When the No.2 operand is not specified in
DM0000 ???
the MOV instruction:
6
Entering CPU positioning instructions ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
EDITOR
[ PLSX ] Edit (E) CPU positioning instruction (3) PLSX (1) Alt +1
[ PLSY ] PLSX (2) Alt +2
JOGX JOGY
CW CW JOGX (3) Alt +3
CCW CCW
HIGH HIGH JOGY (4) Alt +4
ORGY (5) Alt +5
[ ORGX ]
[ ORGY ] ORGY (6) Alt +6
[ TCHX ] TCHX (7) Alt +7
[ TCHY ] TCHY (8) Alt +8
Note: • CPU positioning parameters can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-
700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.
• Normally, the CPU positioning parameter tool bar is not displayed. To
display the tool bar, either click the button (display/hide CPU
positioning parameter tool bar), or select {View (V)} {Tool bar (T)}
{CPU positioning instruction (3)} from menu.
• To use CPU built-in positioning parameters, positioning parameters must
be set separately in addition to entry of instructions.
"Starting Up Edit CPU Positioning Parameter" page 6-147
6-71
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
6
EDITOR
[Tip]
The JOGX, JOGY, ORGX, ORGY, TCHX and TCHY instructions do not have
operands. For this reason, the Change Operand dialog box is not displayed;
only symbols are displayed.
6-72
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
EDITOR
Enters the symbol at the cursor position. The symbol already
entered at the cursor position will be overwritten.
Discards the settings, and closes the Change Operand dialog box.
[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button without specifying the operand, the unspecified
operand is indicated as "???". This is handy if you want to prepare only the
ladder circuit in advance when relay assignments are not fixed.
???
[ PLSX ] When the No.1 operand is not specified in the PLSX instruction:
6-73
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
Delete Instruction
Edit (E) Instruction input 1 (1) Delete instruction (E) (Space) / Delete
Other procedure
• Select the cell on the ladder program to enter the instruction, and press the
6 (Space) key.
• Select the cell on the ladder program to enter the instruction, and press the
EDITOR
Delete key.
6-74
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
[Tip]
Once the default suffix is set, it is automatically stored to KV BUILDER, and so it
is enabled when other files are edited.
Important: The default suffix can be specified only when "KV-700" or "KV-
700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.
1 Select the suffix to set as the default from the [Suffix] pulldown list. 6
This sets the default suffix.
EDITOR
[Tip]
• Even if the default suffix is set, the default suffix you have set can be ignored
and a different suffix can be entered by direct entry.
• If the instruction you have entered does not match the default suffix, the suffix
".U" (values are handled as unsigned binary data) is set to the instruction.
• Data memory and internal register values are handled as follows according to
suffix:
6-75
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
Changing Operands
Edit (E) Instruction palette/Change operand (W)
Change the operand at the current cursor position by the following procedure.
4 You can also enter operands by clicking the "No.2 operand" or "No.3 operand" button
according to the specified instruction, and repeating steps 2 and 3.
6-76
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
EDITOR
Changes the operand at the cursor position.
Discards the settings, and closes the Change Operand dialog box.
[Tip]
If you click the "OK" button without specifying the operand, the unspecified
operand is indicated as "???". This is handy if you want to prepare only the
ladder circuit in advance when relay assignments are not fixed.
6-77
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
By pressing keys
F8 , / : Draws a connecting line downwards from the cursor
position.
F9 , : Draws a connecting line to the right from the cursor
position.
Ctrl + Tab , Alt + : Draws a connecting line to the rung end from the cursor
position.
By clicking icons
: Draws a connecting line downwards from the cursor position.
: Draws a connecting line to the right from the cursor position.
By using the mouse and arrow keys in the Connecting Line Edit mode
In the Connecting Line Edit mode, you can use the mouse and arrow keys to
draw connecting lines.
Enter the Connecting Line Edit mode by the following procedure.
To return to the regular edit mode from the Connecting Line Edit mode, perform
the same operation.
Other procedure
• Select {Edit (E)} {Edit connecting
line (K)} from Menu.
• Press the Ctrl + K keys.
• Press the ¥ key.
6-78
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
In the Connecting Line Edit mode, draw connecting lines by the following procedure.
[Tip]
In the Connecting Line Edit mode, "Edit connecting line (K)" in the menu is
marked.
6
EDITOR
2 Move the mouse cursor to the start position on the connecting line.
3 Drag the mouse from the start position on the connecting line to the final
position on the connecting line.
This draws the connecting line.
Drag mouse.
Other procedure
When drawing connecting lines using the arrow keys, press the at the first
position, and finally press the key after moving by the arrow key in the
direction that you want to draw the connecting line.
6-79
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
By pressing keys
Shift + F8 : Deletes vertical connecting lines to the left of the
cursor position.
(Space) : Deletes the horizontal connecting line at the cursor
position.
Backspace : Deletes the horizontal connecting line at the cursor
position.
Shift
bottom matched to the arrow key direction.
By clicking icons
: Deletes vertical connecting lines to the left of the cursor position.
: Deletes horizontal connecting lines at the cursor position.
By using the mouse and arrow keys in the Connecting Line Edit mode
In the Connecting Line Edit mode, you can use the mouse and arrow keys to
delete connecting lines.
Enter the Connecting Line Edit mode by the following procedure.
To return to the regular edit mode from the Connecting Line Edit mode, perform
the same operation.
Other procedure
• Select {Edit (E)} {Edit connecting
line (K)} from Menu.
• Press the Ctrl + K keys.
• Press the ¥ key.
6-80
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
In the Connecting Line Edit mode, delete connecting lines by the following
procedure.
[Tip]
In the Connecting Line Edit mode, "Edit connecting line (K)" in the menu is
marked.
6
EDITOR
2 Move the mouse cursor to the first position on the connecting line to be
deleted.
3 Drag the mouse from the first position on the connecting line to the final
position on the connecting line with the Shift key held down.
This deletes the connecting line.
Drag mouse.
Other procedure
To delete connecting lines by the arrow keys, move with the arrow key with the
Shift + Alt keys held down.
6-81
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
6
EDITOR
When you select the Extended Ladder mode, and program an output instruction to
the ladder program, the cursor automatically moves to the right without jumping to
the right edge of the rung so that you can continue entering instruction. If the
instruction entry mode is not the Extended Ladder mode, the cursor automatically
jumps to the right edge of the rung when you enter an output instruction.
The default ladder mode when KV BUILDER is first started up is the regular ladder
mode; the Extended Ladder mode is not selected.
For example, the ladder changes as follows when programming the OUT instruction
to the ladder diagram in the Extended Ladder mode.
[Tip]
The Extended Ladder mode setting is automatically saved to KV BUILDER. For
this reason, the setting is enabled when KV BUILDER is next started up.
6-82
6-7 Entering and Deleting Instructions and Connecting Lines
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + G keys.
[Tip] 6
When the Extended Ladder mode is enabled, {Extended ladder mode (G)} is
EDITOR
displayed marked.
[Tip]
If an undo is not possible, the button is displayed gray and cannot be selected.
[Tip]
If a redo is not possible, the button is displayed gray and cannot be selected.
6-83
6-8 Editing Mnemonic Lists
Other procedure
• Press the Ctrl + D keys.
Note: The maximum number of mnemonics that can be edited at a single time in
the Edit List window is 10,000 characters including line feed codes and
spaces. When editing of mnemonics exceeding this limit, quit editing, and
edit the next block of mnemonics.
6-84
6-8 Editing Mnemonic Lists
Inserting an edited mnemonic list at the cursor position and ending editing
1 End editing of mnemonic lists, and then click the "Insert" button.
The Edit List window is closed, and the edited details are inserted at the cursor
position on the ladder diagram.
Replacing an edited mnemonic list with the ladder block at the cursor
position and ending editing
1 End editing of mnemonic lists, and then click the "Replace block" button.
The Edit List window is closed, and the edited details are overwritten on the 6
circuit block at the cursor position in the ladder diagram.
EDITOR
Format of mnemonic lists
Mnemonic lists are configured in the following format:
6-85
6-8 Editing Mnemonic Lists
[Tip]
Cut-and-paste is a standard method of editing in Windows.
6
2
EDITOR
Other procedure
"Dragging" refers to moving the cursor to the final position with the Shift key
held down with the keys, and releasing the keys followed by the
Shift key at the final position.
[Tip]
Key entry operations
Cutting
Ctrl + X key: Cuts and copies the selected range to the cut buffer.
Copying
Ctrl + C key: Copies the selected range to the cut buffer.
Pasting
Ctrl + V key: Pastes the selected range pasted to the cut buffer.
6-86
6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs
[Tip]
Cut-and-paste is a standard method of editing in Windows.
Selecting areas
To copy, move or delete an area, you must first select the area.
There are two ways of selecting an area.
6
Note: You cannot copy, move and delete data in the Connecting Line Edit mode.
EDITOR
If the mode is the Connecting Line Edit mode, select {Edit (E)} {Edit
connecting line (K)} from Menu beforehand, and set the regular edit mode.
6-87
6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs
• Selecting by cells
Drag the pointer horizontally to the desired cell.
• Selecting by rungs
Drag the pointer vertically to the rung to the desired rung.
6
EDITOR
• When cells are selected one cell at a time from right to left or rungs are
selected one rung at a time from bottom to top or vice versa, the left edge
cell and top edge or bottom edge rungs, respectively, cannot be selected.
[Tip]
To cancel a selection, click any position on the ladder diagram.
6-88
6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs
2 Press the arrow key with the Shift key held down, and move the cursor
to the final cell of the area to be selected.
The selected area is displayed in yellow.
• Selecting by cells
Move the pointer to the desired cell using the keys.
• Selecting by rungs
Move the pointer to the desired cell using the keys. 6
EDITOR
Note: • Single cells cannot be selected to straddle multiple rungs.
• When cells are selected one cell at a time from right to left or rungs are
selected one rung at a time from bottom to top or vice versa, the left edge
cell and top edge or bottom edge rungs, respectively, cannot be selected.
3 Release the Shift key at the final cell of the area to be selected.
[Tip]
To cancel a selection, press the arrow key again.
6-89
6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs
1 Specify the area, and select {Edit (E)} {Copy (C)} from Menu.
6
EDITOR
Other procedure
• Select {Copy (C)} from the menu
displayed by clicking the right mouse
button.
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + C keys.
1 Specify the area, and select {Edit (E)} {Cut (T)} from Menu.
Other procedure
• Select {Cut (T)} from the menu
displayed by clicking the right mouse
button.
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + X keys.
6-90
6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs
Other procedure 6
• Select {Paste (T)} from the
EDITOR
menu displayed by clicking the
right mouse button.
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + V keys.
[Tip]
Once data is cut, it is temporarily saved to the cut buffer. If you perform a paste
operation once more after a delete operation, the deleted ladder data can be
pasted again. Copied or cut ladder data can also be pasted repeatedly.
6-91
6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs
6
EDITOR
6-92
6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs
EDITOR
This copies the selected
ladder program area.
"Pasting copied or cut
ladder data" page 6-91
Note: Device comments in ladder programs are not copied if you copy ladder
programs from one ladder program to another using the copy function. To
copy ladder programs with device comments intact, do not use the copy
function; execute "Read other file comments".
"Reading Comments from Other Files" page 6-112
6-93
6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs
6 [Tip]
To insert two or more rungs
EDITOR
Other procedure
• Press the Shift + keys.
• Click the right mouse button, and select
{Insert free rung (O)} from the menu this is
displayed.
6-94
6-9 Copying, Moving and Deleting Ladder Programs
Deleting rungs
Edit (E) Delete rung (Y) Shift + Delete
1 Move the cursor to the rung to delete.
[Tip]
To delete two or more rungs
as a group, select the
desired number of rungs to
delete. In the example 6
below, two free rungs are
deleted.
EDITOR
"Selecting areas" page 6-87
Other procedure
• Press the Shift + Delete keys.
6-95
6-10 Circuit Libraries
• Two types of circuit libraries are available: for KV-10/16/24/40, and for KV-700.
When the KV-700 is used, the circuit library for KV-10/16/24/40 cannot be used;
and when KV-10/16/24/40 is used, the circuit library for KV-700 cannot be used.
• The number of circuits that can be registered to circuit library is not limited. This is
dependent on the amount of free space on the hard disk in use.
• Circuits already containing entered device Nos. and circuits not containing
entered device Nos. for which the pending operand is indicated by "???" can be
6 registered to the circuit library.
• Circuits are registered to the circuit library one rung at a time.
EDITOR
Circuit library
Sample: Several sample circuits that can immediately used are
registered here. For details on registered circuits, see "List of
Circuits Registered to Circuit Library" (A-70).
User: This folder is for registering circuit libraries made by the user.
As the default, no user circuit libraries are registered.
6-96
6-10 Circuit Libraries
1 Select {View (V)} {Circuit library (B)} in order from the Menu.
The circuit library is displayed.
[Tip]
Ladder programs can be edited with circuit library displayed.
Other procedure 6
• Click the button.
EDITOR
Circuit library functions
6-97
6-10 Circuit Libraries
Registering Circuits
Register the circuit to the circuit library by the following procedure.
Note: Be sure to select the range by individual rungs as circuits are registered to
6 the circuit library in rungs.
EDITOR
Other procedure
Move the cursor to the final rung of the range with the keys with the Shift
key held down, and release the keys and Shift key in order at the final
rung.
3 Click the mouse on any rung of the circuit selected in yellow, and drop
the selected circuit at the desired position on the circuit library tree.
The selected circuit is registered on the circuit library under the name "new
circuit."
To change the name, double-click the circuit name.
6-98
6-10 Circuit Libraries
6
[Tip]
EDITOR
The confirmation dialog box is displayed if
circuits with comments are pasted when
comments for devices registered to the
circuit library are already registered on the
ladder program to be pasted. To overwrite
comments, select the "Yes" button, and to
cancel overwriting of comments, select the
"No" button.
Replacing operands in registered circuits
Use the range replace function to change operands in a registered circuit after it
has been replaced.
1 Paste the registered
circuit.
Other procedure
Click the right mouse button, and select [Replace range (A)] in the menu that is
displayed.
6-99
6-10 Circuit Libraries
[Example]
When the operand No. of the relay before replace is 1000 and the operand No.
6 of the relay after replace is 1008.:
All relays in the selected range become a No. obtained by adding eight.
EDITOR
1 Click the right mouse button on the circuit library, and select [Import]
from the menu that is displayed.
This displays the Open dialog box.
6-100
6-10 Circuit Libraries
EDITOR
Export circuit libraries by the following procedure.
1 Click the right mouse button on the circuit library, and select [Export]
from the menu that is displayed.
This displays the Save As dialog box.
6-101
6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels
[Tip]
6 Labels can be used instead of device names when inputting symbols or
finding/replacing symbols. For example, devices names can be written as follows
EDITOR
Comment and label operations are performed in the Edit Comments/Labels dialog
box. This dialog box displays a list of devices by type, which allows you to edit two
more comments as a group. Labels and comments can be changed after directly
selecting the device to be changed on the ladder diagram.
"Directly Changing Comments and Labels on Ladder Diagrams" page 6-109
The ladder program cannot be edited while the Edit Comments/Labels dialog box is
open and comments or labels are being edited.
To edit the ladder program while viewing the list of device comments, use the "multi
comment window." Three multi comment windows can be opened simultaneously.
"Multi Comment Window" page 6-111
6-102
6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels
Comment display preview area on ladder diagram Device display range selection buttons
EDITOR
Label/comment entry area Current entered text
count display area
[Tip]
Devices used on the ladder diagram are prefixed by an asterisk "∗".
2 Specify the type and No. of the device to edit, and click the "Edit" button.
The cursor is displayed at comment 1 in the label/comment entry area, and
entry is possible.
Other procedure
Enter the label/comment directly in the [Device name] field for the device No.,
and click the label/comment entry area to be entered.
6-103
6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels
[Tip]
The devices to be displayed in the list can be narrowed down in the Device list
display condition setting.
[Reg devices only]: Devices to which labels/comments are registered are
displayed.
[Used devices only]: Devices in use on the ladder program are displayed.
If neither of these checkboxes are marked, all devices are displayed.
If both of these checkboxes are marked, devices that satisfy both conditions are
displayed.
6
[Tip]
EDITOR
• The following shows the types and number of characters that can be entered.
Label: Up to eight single-byte alphabetic characters (Spaces and
commas are not allowed.)
Comment 1: Up to 32 single-byte characters (Can be displayed in the KV-700
access window and on KV-D20/30.)
Comment 2: Up to 32 single-byte characters
Comment 3: Up to 32 single-byte characters
• The number of single-byte characters in the currently entered comment is
displayed on the right of the comment entry area.
• On KV BUILDER, device comments can be automatically
registered to special devices (relays, CRs, DMs, CM, etc.
to which fixed functions are already registered).
To register device comments, click "Reg special devices
(B)" in the Edit Comments/Labels dialog box.
Register special device comments of the PLC type in use
to Comment 1.
Also, when editing by unit, functions assigned to devices on special units can
be registered to Contact Comments automatically as unit device comments. To
register, click [Reg units devices] in the Edit Comments/Labels dialog box.
Register device functions currently being edited to Comment 1.
• The maximum number of characters in
comments on the ladder diagram is 16
single-byte characters on the KV-
10/16/24/40, and 24 single-byte
characters on the KV-700. How entered
comments will be displayed on the ladder
program can be checked in the preview
area.
6-104
6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels
[Tip]
• The limits for display of comments on ladder programs are as follows: 16
characters on the KV-10/16/24/40, and 24 characters on the KV-700.
• To display labels and comments you have written, you must first switch the
display mode. Select {View (V)} from Menu, and then select {Label (L)} or
{Comment (C)} from the sub-menu. You can also set comment display by the
button.
"View Modes" page 6-22
EDITOR
Label
Comment
2 Mark the checkbox by the edit item at "Unit select", and select the unit to
edit from the dropdown menu.
6-105
6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels
[Tip]
• The following shows the types and number of characters that can be entered.
Label: Up to eight single-byte alphabetic characters (Spaces and
commas are not allowed.)
Comment 1: Up to 32 single-byte characters (Can be displayed in the KV-700
access window and on KV-D20/30.)
Comment 2: Up to 32 single-byte characters
Comment 3: Up to 32 single-byte characters
• The number of single-byte characters in the currently entered comment is
displayed on the right of the comment entry area.
• On KV BUILDER, device comments can be automatically
registered to special devices (relays, CRs, DMs, CM, etc. to
which fixed functions are already registered).
To register device comments, click "Reg special devices
(B)" in the Edit Comments/Labels dialog box.
Also, when editing by unit, functions assigned to devices on
special units can be registered to Contact Comments
6 automatically as unit device comments. To register, click [Reg units devices] in
the Edit Comments/Labels dialog box. Register device functions currently
being edited to Comment 1.
EDITOR
Label
Comment
6-106
6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels
2 Move the cursor to the copy destination device, and click the "Write"
button.
[Tip]
If you click the "Exchange" button instead of the "Write" button, the comment of
the currently selected device is swapped with the content of the entry area.
EDITOR
already used." is displayed. If you click the "OK"
button to close the dialog box, only the comments
will be copied.
[Tip]
To delete the comments of all devices, click the "Delete all" button. The
confirmation message is displayed. Click the "Yes" button.
6-107
6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels
[Tip]
Only devices of the selected type are overwritten.
If you pasted only comment 2 type comments, the information of comment 1 and
3 type comments, remains as it is. When All comments is pasted, all comments
are overwritten.
6-108
6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels
2 Click the "Block edit 1 Select the range. 2 Click the "Block
(M)" button. edit (M)" button. 6
The Edit Block dialog
EDITOR
box is displayed.
4 To copy comments, click the "Copy (C)" button, and to move comments,
click the "Cut (X)" button.
6-109
6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels
Other procedure
• Changing labels
Press the Ctrl + B keys
• Changing comments
Press the Ctrl + M keys
[Tip]
• Which of Comments 1 to 3
can be changed is determined
by the settings in the View
Display Mode dialog box
displayed by {View (V)}
{View mode (D)}. (Default is
Comment 1.)
"View Modes" page 6-22
• Registered characters are
displayed when labels and
comments are already
registered to devices.
6-110
6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels
[Tip]
The maximum number of characters in comments on the ladder program is 16 single-byte
characters on the KV-10/16/24/40, and 24 single-byte characters on the KV-700.
6
Multi Comment Window ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
EDITOR
Comment (C) Multi comment window (M)
• You can edit ladder programs while viewing the list of device comments.
Other procedure
• Click the window.
6-111
6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels
• The Edit Comments/Labels dialog box cannot be used while a multi comment
window is open.
[Tip]
Only comments 1 are displayed in the KV-D20/D30 and KV-700 access windows.
Also, only comments 1 can be transferred to the KV-10/16/24/40 and KV-700.
"Setting Transfer of Comments" page 6-121
Note: • This menu item is not displayed unless the ladder program window is
displayed.
• Only comments are read by this function; the ladder program is not read.
6-112
6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels
[Tip]
Comment files can also be specified by entering the file name, and by selecting
the comment file to be read from the file list with the mouse.
EDITOR
displays the numbers of comments that have been read.
Note: • When comments are read from other files, the comments are read to the
ladder program currently being edited. For this reason, the comments in
the ladder program currently being edited are overwritten. If you need the
comments in the ladder program currently being edited, you must first
save them separately by "Saving comments in text format" before you
execute reading of comments from other files.
"Saving and Reading Comments in Text Format" page 6-114
• The following illustrates how comments are overwritten. In the following
example, the ladder B comments of timers 000 to 010 and data
memories DM1000 to 1012 disappear as they are overwritten with the
comments of ladder A.
6-113
6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels
6
EDITOR
• Text in comment files is delimited by a comma ",". Short comment files can be
read even if text is not inserted between commas. For example, when only
Comment 1 is entered for relay 00000, the comment file is described as follows:
"00000,, Comment 1 ,,"
• When comments are saved, they are automatically saved and assigned a text
string of fixed length. (Parts of files in which comments are not entered are
described as blank spaces.)
• The following shows the type of characters and number of characters used in
comment files.
Name of Label Eight alphabet characters can be entered. Spaces and commas cannot be entered.
Comment 1
Comment 2 32 characters can be entered. (Commas cannot be entered.)
Comment 3
"Editing Comments and Labels" page 6-102
Saving comments
Save labels or comments in the ladder program currently being edited in text format
by the following procedure.
6-114
6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels
[Tip]
The file is automatically appended with the extender ".txt" or ".csv" when the file
name is set even if it is not specified when the file name is entered.
EDITOR
Reading comments
Read already saved comment files by the following procedure.
[Tip]
Comment files can also be specified by entering the file name, and by selecting
the comment file to be read from the file list with the mouse.
6-115
6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels
Note: • When comments are read from other files, the comments are read to the
ladder program currently being edited. For this reason, the comments in
the ladder program currently being edited are overwritten. If you need the
comments in the ladder program currently being edited, you must first
save them separately by "Saving comments in text format" before you
execute reading of comments from other files.
"Saving and Reading Comments in Text Format" page 6-114
• The following illustrates how comments are overwritten. In the following
example, the ladder B comments of timers 000 to 010 and data
memories DM1000 to 1012 disappear as they are overwritten with the
comments of ladder A.
6
EDITOR
[Example]
Reading comment files in the spreadsheet software Microsoft Excel 97
6-116
6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels
2 Start up Excel, and select {Files of type} "Comma delimited file" in the
Open File dialog box.
[Tip]
Comment files can also be specified by entering the file name, and by selecting
the comment file to be read from the file list with the mouse. 6
[Example]
EDITOR
Saving comment files in the spreadsheet software Microsoft Excel97
Note: When you create comments in Excel, be sure to enter each of the items to
individual cells. When not entering items to a cell, leave the cell blank.
1 Select [File type] "CSV (Comma delimited)" in the Save File As dialog
box that is displayed when you save the file.
Note: The file is automatically appended with the extender ".csv" when the file
name is set even if it is not specified when the file name is entered.
6-117
6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels
[Tip]
Up to 70 single-byte characters can be displayed in rung comments per single
rung. Characters exceeding this limit are displayed after being automatically fed
to the next line.
Rung comments extending over any number of multiple lines can be edited by
inserting line feeds at the desired locations.
6-118
6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels
Note: If you click the "Overwr" button, the ladder diagram on the rung where the
cursor is currently located is deleted. Before overwriting on the ladder
program, first make sure that it is OK to delete the ladder diagram.
EDITOR
Set and cancel conversion of ladders into rung comments by the following
procedure.
6-119
6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels
Other procedure
Setting rung comments
• Select "Rung comment - Set (S)" from the menu that is displayed by clicking
the right mouse button.
• Press the Ctrl + Q keys.
Canceling rung comments
• Select "Rung comment - Release (R)" from the menu that is displayed by
clicking the right mouse button.
• Press the Ctrl + W keys.
6
EDITOR
6-120
6-11 Inputting Comments and Labels
EDITOR
move setup (K)} from Menu.
The Comment Move Setup dialog box
is displayed.
Important: • The comment transfer range setting is not available when the KV-
700 is used.
• Only Comment 1 type comments can be transferred to the PLC.
Comment 2 and 3 type comments are not transferred even if they
are set.
6-121
6-12 Jump, Find and Replace
Jump
Jump to any position by specifying the rung No. or step in the ladder program, or
jump to the start or end of a rung. This function is used to immediately change the
editing position.
Specify the rung No. or step No. in the ladder diagram to jump to a specific position
by the following procedure.
6
1
EDITOR
Other procedure
• Press the number keys directly on the keyboard.
[Tip]
• To cancel a jump, click the "Jump" button.
• The final rung or step is displayed if you specify a No. greater than the final
rung No. or step No.
Note: To jump by step Nos., the program must already have been converted.
6-122
6-12 Jump, Find and Replace
Other procedure
6
Press the Ctrl + Home keys.
EDITOR
Jumping to bottom rung
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + End keys.
[Tip]
This function is used to jump repeatedly to the same rung, or when you cannot
tell where you are in a ladder program just by looking at the rung No.
6-123
6-12 Jump, Find and Replace
Registering rungs
Register rungs to jump to by the following procedure.
2 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {Register rung (A)} from Menu.
The Register Rung dialog box is displayed.
6
EDITOR
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + L keys.
Displays the rung No. at the cursor position. When a rung No.
is entered, the No. is registered.
[Tip]
Up to 70 single-byte characters can be entered to a comment.
[Tip]
Up to 32 rungs can be registered in a single ladder program. If you attempt to
register more than this number of rungs, the oldest registered rung is
automatically deleted, and the new rung is registered.
6-124
6-12 Jump, Find and Replace
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + J keys.
2 Click and select the rung to jump to from the list of currently displayed 6
rung Nos. and comments, and click the "Jump" button.
EDITOR
The specified rung is displayed, and the cursor moves to the specified rung.
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + J keys.
6-125
6-12 Jump, Find and Replace
6
EDITOR
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + keys.
Note: You cannot jump to the previous circuit block from the comment rung.
1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {Next block (P)} from Menu.
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + keys.
Note: You cannot jump to the next circuit block from the comment rung.
6-126
6-12 Jump, Find and Replace
EDITOR
Other procedure
Press the Shift + Tab keys.
Note: You cannot jump to the previous symbol from the comment rung.
1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {Next symbol (F)} from Menu.
Other procedure
Press the Tab key.
Note: You cannot jump to the next symbol from the comment rung.
6-127
6-12 Jump, Find and Replace
Jump to the start or end of rungs where the cursor is located by the following
procedure.
1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {Top of rung (H)} from Menu.
6
EDITOR
Other procedure
Press the Home key.
1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {End of rung (E)} from Menu.
Other procedure
Press the End key.
6-128
6-12 Jump, Find and Replace
1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {Change: Prev block (O)} from
Menu.
EDITOR
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + keys.
1 Select {Find/Replace (K)} {Jump (J)} {Change: Next block (Q)} from
Menu.
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + keys.
6-129
6-12 Jump, Find and Replace
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F keys.
[Tip]
The regular display/reduced display setting for the Find dialog box is saved to
KV BUILDER. For this reason, the setting is enabled when KV BUILDER is next
started up.
Clicking the button to the right of the instruction and operand entry field
displays a pulldown menu which displays a history of the last ten searches.
[Tip]
To search timer, counter, or high-speed counter instructions, enter the TMR or C
instructions. To search operands, enter T0 or C0.
6-130
6-12 Jump, Find and Replace
Of the rung comments in the ladder program, searches rung comments written
continuously to multiple rungs excluding comments from the 2nd rung onwards.
EDITOR
A list of the search results is displayed here.
The cell No. is assigned a number 0, 1, 2, 3 and so forth to 9 from the left edge.
• Rung comments, top rung comment
6-131
6-12 Jump, Find and Replace
Replacing Operands・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
Find/Replace (K) Replace operand (R) Ctrl + R
Batch replace operands with other operands by the following procedure.
6
EDITOR
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + R keys.
2 Enter the before and after operand, replacement width and replacement
range.
Specify the range of rung Nos. to replace by rung No. In the default setting,
the entire range in the ladder program is automatically entered.
Enter the replacement width (replacement When this checkbox is marked, the comment
range from operand before replacement). or label also moves matched to replacement
of the operand.
[Tip]
What is the "replacement width?"
The replace width refers to the extent that operands are to be replaced.
For example, if "3" is specified when converting "03000" to "00500", operands
"03000 to 03002" are replaced to "05000 to 05002".
6-132
6-12 Jump, Find and Replace
Note: When "Move comment/label" is selected, all comments for devices in the
set range are replaced. When converting from 00000 to 00010, the
6
comment of 00000 disappears, and all comments of 00010 become the
EDITOR
source 00000 comments.
[Tip]
• To cancel the replace, click the "Cancel" button.
• The confirmation message is not displayed if the "Replace all" checkbox is
marked.
6-133
6-12 Jump, Find and Replace
6
EDITOR
6-134
6-12 Jump, Find and Replace
[Example]
When the operand No. of the relay before replace is 1000 and the operand No. 6
of the relay after replace is 1008, all relays in the selected range become a No.
EDITOR
obtained by adding eight.
6-135
6-12 Jump, Find and Replace
Other procedure
6 • Press the Ctrl + A keys.
EDITOR
[Tip]
• To cancel the replace, click the "Cancel"
button.
• The confirmation message is not displayed if the "Replace all" checkbox is
marked.
6-136
6-13 Displaying Use Status
EDITOR
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + E keys.
Displays the devices in the Display Usage Status dialog box in device for unit notation.
Note: When the KV-700 is used, the X, Y, M and S guides are displayed based
upon the relay assignment settings in Unit Editor. If the relay assignments
are not set, all relays from relay 1000 onwards are displayed as "M".
6-137
6-13 Displaying Use Status
[Tip]
• The ladder program can be edited while the Display Use Status dialog box is
displayed.
• Device Nos. are displayed as follows.
Example) 00000 to 00015 are displayed as follows:
6
EDITOR
6-138
6-14 Unit Viewer
Display a list of relays or data memories assigned to units in Unit Editor by the
following procedure.
Note: • Unit Viewer can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is selected
at the PLC type setting.
• Nothing is displayed if relays or data memories are not assigned on Unit
Editor.
"UNIT EDITOR" page 5-1
6
1 Select {Tools (T)} {Unit Viewer (V)} from Menu.
EDITOR
The [Unit Viewer] dialog box is displayed.
Other procedure
• Press the F2 key.
• Click the button.
Closes Unit Viewer. Sets the view options. Displays the number of DMs for which the unit is selected.
[Tip]
You can edit ladder programs while the Unit Viewer dialog box is displayed.
6-139
6-14 Unit Viewer
Other procedure
• Press the F2 key.
• Click the button.
6
2 Click the "View options" button.
EDITOR
3 Mark the checkbox of the display items, and click the "OK" button.
The item to display is changed.
6-140
6-15 Conversion
6-15 Conversion
This section describes how to convert ladder programs created using Editor so that
they can be used on KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700.
EDITOR
This converts the ladder program, and the confirmation message is displayed.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F9 keys.
6-141
6-15 Conversion
Rung where
error occurred Content of error
Error code
Jumps to rung in program where the error occurred. Closes the Error Display
window.
[Tip]
To re-display the error list, select {Convert (A)} {Error display (E)} from Menu.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F10 keys.
6-142
6-15 Conversion
Note: This function can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is selected
at the PLC type setting.
[Tip]
Invalid operands
When the KV-700 is in use, relays and DMs are assigned in Unit Editor. Unit
setup information is linked to the ladder program. So, when unit setup
information is changed, the change is linked to automatically change the relays
and DM Nos. on the ladder program. However, when a unit to which relays and
DMs are assigned is deleted, this means that relays and DMs assigned to the
6
unit exist on the ladder program even though that unit does not exist. Relays and
EDITOR
DMs whose relationship with the unit has been discontinued in this way are
called "invalid operands."
Ladder programs containing invalid operands are not converted properly. To
cancel invalid operands, either use the "clear invalid operand function," or
individually check each of the invalid operands, and reset the unit assignments.
[Tip]
Invalid operands can be searched.
"Searching for Instructions and Operands" page 6-130
6-143
6-15 Conversion
Note: • The device auto-conversion function can be used only when "KV-700" or
"KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.
• When the device auto-conversion function is not used, change the
assigned devices set on Unit Editor, and then manually change the
device Nos. on the ladder.
6-144
6-15 Conversion
[Tip]
• Locations in the ladder program to which redundant coils are programmed do
not result in an error after conversion is performed.
• When two or more OUT or OUB instructions are used on the same output relay,
output is performed giving precedence to the last programmed instruction. (In
the following example, output 00500 does not turn ON even if either of inputs
00000 turns ON.)
6
• The redundant coil check is judged by four instructions: OUT, OUB, DIFU
EDITOR
Note:
and DIFD.
• Some ladder programs sometimes run as if redundant coils have been
programmed even if an error is not found in the redundant coil check.
1 Make the ladder program targeted for the redundant coil check the
current window.
[Tip]
When a redundant coil is
found in the check, the Error
List window is displayed, and
you can check the operands
and rung No. where the
redundant coil is programmed.
"Displaying Errors" page 6-142
6-145
6-15 Conversion
Setting a Password
Monitor/Simulator (M) Password setup(P)
The "password setting function" is for inhibiting reading and writing of unit setup
information, programs and comments stored in KV-700 memory.
When a password is set, reading and writing cannot be performed unless the
correct password is entered. Set a password if unauthorized reading or overwriting
of ladder programs will pose a problem.
Register and delete passwords by the following procedure.
Note: The "password setting function" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-
700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.
6
EDITOR
2 Enter the password, and click the "OK" button. To delete an already
registered password, delete the displayed password, and click the "OK"
button.
[Tip]
You can enter up to six single-byte alphanumeric characters for passwords.
If you forget your password, either execute an all clear in the KV-700 CPU Unit's
access window, or overwrite the ladder program. Either of these methods clears
the password. Note that when a password is cleared, all settings and user
programs are also cleared. We recommend backing up ladder programs to which
a password has been set beforehand so that forgetting the password poses no
problems.
The following table shows the range of protection when a password is registered
and the ladder program is transferred to the KV-700.
Operation Range of Protection
PC → KV-700 Overwritable
KV-700 → PC Password protection
PC Memory Card → KV-700 Overwritable
KV-700 → Memory Card Readable
PC → Memory Card Overwritable
Memory Card → PC Password protection
KV-700
Memory Card
6-146
6-16 Starting Up External Tools
Point parameters: These are the basic parameters in trapezoidal control for
setting travel destination points (positions), operation and 6
startup speed, and acceleration/deceleration time.
EDITOR
System parameters: These are the parameters for setting sensor input and pulse
output, comparators, and zero return/jog operation.
Main functions
• 32 point parameters can be preset on KV-BUILDER. If more than 32 point
parameters are set, the content of control memories (CM) is overwritten by the
ladder program.
• You can select from two control methods: position control and speed control. You
can also set incremental values and absolute values for the target values and
travel amounts.
• Pulse for two axes can be output, and pulse frequencies within the range 50Hz to
100000Hz are supported on both axes.
• Both 1 pulse and 2 pulses are supported as the pulse output mode. Select the
pulse output mode that best suits the driver method for the connected mode.
1 Select {Tools (T)} {Edit CPU positioning parameters (I)} from Menu.
The Edit CPU Positioning Parameter window is displayed.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F3 key.
6-147
6-16 Starting Up External Tools
Reflects the changes in the settings, and closes the Edit CPU positioning parameter screen.
Copies the selected range. Applies the settings to the current content.
(1)
Parameters that are set are stored in CM (control memory) on the CPU Unit. Point
parameters are shared for both the X- and Y-axes.
6-148
6-16 Starting Up External Tools
The details of the [I/O Setup] tab in the Edit CPU positioning parameters dialog
box are displayed.
For details on each item, see "10-2 Setting Up Parameters and Executing
Instructions" (page 10-4) in the KV-700 CPU Unit Manual.
(1)
Storage location
device name
(3)
(2)
(5)
(4)
(7)
(6)
(9)
(8)
6
(10)
EDITOR
Storage location (11)
device name
6-149
6-16 Starting Up External Tools
(1)
(2)
(3)
Storage location
device name
(4)
(5)
6
EDITOR
6-150
6-16 Starting Up External Tools
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4) Storage location
device name
(5)
(6)
(7)
6
EDITOR
(8)
(9)
6 When you have finished setting each of the parameters, click the "OK"
button.
This closes the Edit CPU positioning parameters screen.
The point parameters and system parameters that you set are saved to file.
Program positioning instructions in the ladder program for use.
"Entering CPU positioning instructions" page 6-71
"10-2 Setting Up Parameters and Executing Instructions" (page 10-4) in the
"KV-700 Series User's Manual"
6-151
6-17 Printing Ladder Programs
EDITOR
1 Select {File (F)} {Print (P)} from Menu.
The Print/Print Preview dialog box is displayed.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + P keys.
2 Set the details to be printed. To print an item, select "ON", and to cancel
printing, select "OFF".
[Tip]
As the default setting, only ladder diagrams are set to be printed.
6-153
6-17 Printing Ladder Programs
Note: When setting are changed, and the "Cancel" button is clicked, the changed
settings are invalidated.
[Tip]
When "XYM," "Signed of decimal constants" and "Grid" are set in the display
mode, details are printed at the set view mode.
"View Modes" page 6-22
6-154
6-17 Printing Ladder Programs
EDITOR
Font used for printing (Only fonts currently
Font MS Sans Serif
Title name registered to the PC in use can be selected.)
Size Size of font to be printed 20
Font used for printing (Only fonts currently
Font MS Sans Serif
Author registered to the PC in use can be selected.)
Size Size of font to be printed 12
Font used for printing (Only fonts currently
Font MS Sans Serif
Memo registered to the PC in use can be selected.)
Size Size of font to be printed 12
12 points and 20 points are roughly equal to 4.233 mm and 7.056 mm, respectively.
At 12 points, a single 2-byte character is roughly 3.8 mm square, and at 20 points
roughly 6.3 mm square. (This also varies slightly according to the precision of your
printer.)
Sample printout
6-155
6-17 Printing Ladder Programs
Enter the rung No. to start printing from. Specify the number of
printed rungs per page.
Enter the rung No. to stop printing at.
6 Select the type of
comments to print.
Select whether to print operands on ladder
EDITOR
Sample printout
[Tip]
Color printing is possible when a color printer is used to printing only ladder
diagrams.
6-156
6-17 Printing Ladder Programs
Enter the step No. to start printing from. Specify the number of
printed lines per page.
Enter the step No. to stop printing at.
Select the type of
comments to print.
Select whether to print operands on
ladder diagrams displayed as devices
or labels.
EDITOR
6-157
6-17 Printing Ladder Programs
6
EDITOR
[Tip]
All devices are set to be printed as the default.
Item Set Details (input range)
Relay
Timer Range of use for each PLC type (entire usable range)
Counter
High-speed counter
Comparator
Data memory Range of use for each PLC type (entire usable range)
Temporary memory
Control relay
Range of use for each PLC type (entire usable range)
Control memory
Number of rungs (30 to 120) printed per
Rungs/page 70
page
Verify information ON/OFF ON
6-158
6-17 Printing Ladder Programs
[Tip]
Control relays and control memories are displayed only when "KV-700" or "KV-
700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.
Sample printout
EDITOR
Mark the checkbox of the
device to be printed.
[Tip]
• As the default setting, all devices are set to be printed as the default.
• "Other" includes timers, counters, high-speed counters, comparators, and
temporary memories.
• Control relays and control memories are displayed only when "KV-700" or
"KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.
Sample printout
6-159
6-17 Printing Ladder Programs
[Tip]
As the default setting, CPU positioning parameters are set to be printed in the
CM display.
Sample printout
6 Point parameter
EDITOR
System parameter
6-160
6-17 Printing Ladder Programs
Sample printout
EDITOR
Setting printing of unit relay/DM lists
Sample printout
6-161
6-17 Printing Ladder Programs
Preview ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
File (F) Print preview (V)
Display a preview of what will be printed by the following procedure.
Other procedure
Click the button.
6
2 Set the details to be printed. To print an item, select "ON", and to cancel
EDITOR
[Tip]
As the default setting, only ladder diagrams are set to be printed as the default.
6-162
6-17 Printing Ladder Programs
Displays the
previous page. Enlarges the
display size.
EDITOR
Specifies the number of preview pages to be displayed on screen at once.
[Tip]
Clicking the "Print" button displays the details to be printed.
6-163
6-17 Printing Ladder Programs
6
EDITOR
Important: The properties that are displayed vary according to the printer you are
using.
[Tip]
For details on how to set up the printer, refer to the User's Manual for the printer.
6-164
6-18 Changing the Screen Display Color
EDITOR
2 Select the items whose color is to be changed from the [Selected area]
field, and click the button at [Col] to select the color.
[Tip]
• Once colors are set, the colors are enabled when KV BUILDER is next started
up as they are saved on KV BUILDER.
• To return colors to their defaults after they have been saved, click the
"Defaults" button.
6-165
6-18 Changing the Screen Display Color
3 Select the color from the basic colors, and click the "OK" button.
6 [Tip]
EDITOR
If you cannot find the color you want in the basic colors, click the "Define Custom
Colors >>" button to create your own colors. Specify colors by tint and
brightness, and add more colors by clicking the "Add to Custom Colors" button.
Additional colors are added to [Custom Colors].
Set the
brightness.
Adds newly
created colors.
6-166
6-18 Changing the Screen Display Color
[Tip]
Unit display colors can be changed in either Editor or Unit Editor.
The colors of units are reflected in both applications after they are changed.
"Setting Unit Color" page 5-51
EDITOR
2 Select the item whose color is to be changed from the dropdown list, and
click the button at [Col] to select the color.
[Tip]
• Once colors are set, the colors are enabled when KV BUILDER is next started
up as they are saved on KV BUILDER.
• To return colors to their defaults after they have been saved, click the "Restore
defaults" button.
6-167
6-18 Changing the Screen Display Color
3 Select the color from the basic colors, and click the "OK" button.
6 [Tip]
EDITOR
If you cannot find the color you want in the basic colors, click the "Define Custom
Colors >>" button to create your own colors. Specify colors by tint and
brightness, and add more colors by clicking the "Add to Custom Colors" button.
Additional colors are added to [Custom Colors].
Set the
brightness.
Adds newly
created colors.
6-168
6-18 Changing the Screen Display Color
EDITOR
2 Unmark the [Display startup title] checkbox.
This disables display of the title screen.
To enable animation at startup, mark the checkbox.
6-169
Chapter 7
MONITOR
This chapter describes Monitor functions and how to use them.
Outline of Functions
"Monitors" compile (convert) ladder programs created on Unit Editor, transfers them
to the PLC (KV-10/16/24/40 Basic Unit, KV-700 CPU Unit) where they are actually
executed, and checks their operating status. You can also transfer ladder programs
on actually connected PLCs to the PC, decompile and actually execute them to
check their operating status.
• Check the operating status of ladder programs in real time in the form of a ladder
diagram or high-speed time chart
• Select the PLC operation mode
• Forcibly turn input contacts ON/OFF on the Monitor screen by inhibiting input
7 refreshing
• Easily change the setting values and current values of device data and
MONITOR
timers/counters
• Save/read a specified range of device current values to floppy disk or Memory
Card
• Return some devices to their defaults.
Monitor Restrictions
• After a Monitor is stopped, do not disconnect the PLC and connect a different PLC
with the Monitor window still displayed.
The content of the ladder program on the PLC will no longer match the Ladder
Monitor on the Monitor window, and operation will no longer be normal.
• Operation slows down when there are lots of devices to monitor. Either minimize
or close windows that do not need to be monitored. Minimized windows are not
monitored.
• Minimizing the entire Monitor window stops monitor operation. To resume
monitoring, either select {Start Monitor} from Menu, or click .
"Starting the Monitor" page 7-66
• Registration Monitor time charts do not function using the scan time of the PLC.
• Other windows are not monitored when monitoring of a high-speed time chart is
being executed.
• Up to 1,000 comments can be transferred on the KV-10/16/24/40, and up to 5,000
comments (10,000 comments when memory is expanded) can be transferred on
the KV-700.
"Setting Transfer of Comments" page 6-121
7-2
7-1 Outline of Monitor Functions
MONITOR
Cautions when the USB Port Is Used
• When connecting to the USB port using the USB cable, leave the KV-700 turned
ON.
• To use the USB port, a USB-compatible OS such as Windows 98 must already be
installed on the PC.
• When using the KV-700 by a USB connection, directly connect the KV-700 to the
USB port on the PC. Do not connect the KV-700 via a USB hub.
• When communications cannot be performed properly due to unstable or
interrupted communications caused by noise, disconnect the USB cable
connected to the KV-700 from the PC and insert it again. If communications is
unstable or noise frequently occurs in the operating environment, attach a ferrite
core to the USB cable. Attaching ferrite cores along the entire length of the USB
cable will prove more effective in inhibiting noise.
7-3
7-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions
Standard
The following table shows icons displayed on the tool bar that visually represent
frequently performed operations on Monitor screens.
Important: "High-speed Time Chart Monitor," "Serial port," "USB" and "Calendar
timer setup" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is
selected.
Display at bottom of Displays Ladder Monitor at the bottom of the screen regardless of
7-54
Ladder Monitor its active/inactive state.
Ladder Monitor Opens the Ladder Monitor window. 7-46
Enlarge display Enlarges the display ratio of the ladder diagram. 7-49
Reduce display Reduces the display ratio of the ladder diagram. 7-49
Display/hide Switches display/hide of the device comment on the ladder
7-52
comment diagram.
Communicates with the KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700 using the serial
Serial port 7-18
point.
USB Communicates with the KV-700 using the USB port. 7-18
7-4
7-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions
Unit Monitor
Unit Monitor monitors and displays the states of individual units based upon the unit
connection information stored on the KV-700.
MONITOR
Custom Monitor
Custom Monitor monitors and displays the internal states of the special functions of
the KV-700 CPU Unit.
7-5
7-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions
Display
This tool bar groups additional operations that are used in online editing.
Important: The "View" tool bar can be displayed and used only during online
editing.
7 Instruction Palette
This tool bar groups together the instruction palette for freely pasting instructions to
MONITOR
Important: The "Instruction palette" can be displayed and used only during online
editing.
7-6
7-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions
Instructions 1
This tool bar groups together basic instructions.
Important: The "Instructions 1" tool bar can be displayed and used only during
online editing.
Enter NO contact
Enters NO contact OR. 6-59
OR
Enter NC contact
Enters NC contact OR. 6-59
OR
Enter NC contact
Enters the OUB instruction (output reversed coil). 6-61
coil
Enter vertical
Enters a vertical connecting line. 6-78
connecting line
Delete vertical
Deletes a vertical connecting line. 6-80
7
connecting line
MONITOR
Enter horizontal
Enters a horizontal connecting line. 6-78
connecting line
Delete horizontal
Deletes a horizontal connecting line. 6-80
connecting line
Instructions 2
This tool bar groups together additional instructions.
Important: The "Instructions 2" tool bar can be displayed and used only during
online editing.
7-7
7-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions
Important: The "CPU Positioning Instructions" tool bar can be displayed and
used only during online editing.
Suffix
This tool bar groups together tools for setting the radix of the data used in applied
and arithmetic operation instructions, and for setting the default format for the data
length.
Important: The "Suffix" tool bar can be displayed and used only during online
editing.
Default suffix Sets the radix of the default when instructions are entered. 6-75
7-8
7-3 Outline of Menu Functions
File
This menu groups Monitor window operations and printing related items.
MONITOR
Item Function See page
Ladder Monitor Opens the Ladder Monitor window. 7-46
Registration Monitor Opens the Registration Monitor window. 7-84
Batch Monitor Opens the Batch Monitor window. 7-73
Batch Change Opens the Batch Change window. 7-132
7-77
Opens the window of each of the already saved Registration Monitor,
Open window 7-89
Batch Monitor and Batch Change windows.
7-135
Save window Saves the currently active window.
7-76
Save window as... Saves the currently active window under a new name. 7-88
7-134
Print Prints the currently active Registration Monitor window. 7-102
Displays a preview of the currently active Registration Monitor 7-101
Print preview
window.
Printer setup Sets the printer to print from. 7-101
Return to Editor Exits the Monitor and returns to the Editor screen. 7-44
7-9
7-3 Outline of Menu Functions
Edit
This menu groups together items that are used when creating ladder programs by
online editing.
Important: The "Edit" menu can be displayed and used only during online
editing.
7-10
7-3 Outline of Menu Functions
7
Comment
MONITOR
This menu groups together items for editing device comments and rung comments
in online editing.
Important: The "Comment" menu can be displayed and used only during online
editing.
Change comment Changes the device comment at the current cursor position. 6-110
7-11
7-3 Outline of Menu Functions
Search
This menu groups search items on the Ladder Monitor.
Important: The "Use status" tool bar can be displayed and used only during
7 online editing.
MONITOR
Next symbol Moves to the symbol following the current cursor position. 7-61
Moves the cursor to the start of the rung at the current cursor
Top of rung 7-62
position.
Moves the cursor to the end of the rung at the current cursor
End of rung 7-62
position.
Jumps to the previous program change block from the current cursor
Change: Prev block 7-63
position.
Jumps to the next program change block from the current cursor
Change: Next block 7-63
position.
Find Opens the Find dialog box for searching for devices. 7-64
Displays the device used/unused list for devices on the ladder
Use status 6-137
program currently being edited.
7-12
7-3 Outline of Menu Functions
PLC
This menu groups operation items on the KV main unit.
Important: "Calendar timer setup" and "Clear CM for KV-D30" can be used only
when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.
MONITOR
Inhibit input refreshing Inhibits external input processing to KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700. 7-69
Inhibit output Inhibits external output from KV-10/16/24/40, KV-700. 7-69
Calendar timer setup Sets the calendar timer built-in KV-700. 7-70
Clears all DM (data memory) values held by KV-10/16/24/40, KV-
Clear all devices
7-13
7-3 Outline of Menu Functions
Monitor
This menu groups items relating to operations in the Monitor modes.
Important: "High-speed Time Chart Monitor" can be used only when "KV-700" or
"KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.
Monitor
Online Edit
This menu groups together items that are used in online editing.
Important: The "Online Edit" menu can be used only when"KV-700" or "KV-
700+M" is selected.
7-14
7-3 Outline of Menu Functions
Setting
This menu sets the serial ports on the PC.
Important: "Unit No. setup," "Modem setup," "PC modem setup," "KV-L20
modem setup," "1 USB port," "2 Serial port," "3 Modem mode" and "4
Ethernet port" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is
selected at the PLC type setting.
MONITOR
Sets the modem currently connected to the PC in the modem
PC modem setup 7-23
Modem
communications mode.
setup
7-15
7-3 Outline of Menu Functions
View
This menu groups items that are used when creating ladder diagrams.
Important: • "Standard," "Unit monitor," "Custom monitor" and "Device for unit"
7 can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is selected at the
PLC type setting.
• "Display," "Instruction palette," "Instruction 1," "Instruction 2," "CPU
MONITOR
7-16
7-3 Outline of Menu Functions
Tools
The tools menu groups together various settings and setup software items that are
used when creating ladder programs in online editing.
Important: The "Tools" menu can be displayed and used only during online
editing.
Window
This menu groups items relating to display of the ladder window. 7
MONITOR
Item Function See page
Cascade Cascades opened windows.
Side by side Displays opened windows side by side.
Align icons Cleans up minimized windows.
1 Ladder Monitor Selects the window to set as the active window when two or more
(open Monitor window) ladder edit windows are opened.
Help
This menu groups Help such as how to operate KV BUILDER and how to use
instructions.
7-17
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
[Tip]
Communications settings are saved on KV BUILDER, and are reflected in
parameters when KV BUILDER is next started up.
2 Serial port
3 Modem mode
4 Ethernet port
When a ladder program is already open, perform communications setup on models
currently set on the ladder program.
7-18
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
Set the communications port on the PC and other settings in the Monitor Setup
mode.
Start up the Setup mode by the following procedure.
MONITOR
10/16/24/40 and for KV-700. Set each of these settings.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F1 keys.
7-19
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
• Serial port: The RS-232C terminal (the PC's serial port) is used for
communications.
• USB port: The USB port is used for communications. Using the USB port
allows you to monitor operation at a speed higher than that
afforded by the serial port.
A PC with a USB port and pre-installed with Windows 98 (SE),
Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP is required.
Note: • The Add New Hardware Wizard dialog box is displayed only when the
KV-700 is connected to the PC's USB port for the first time. In this dialog
box, install the driver.
"1-5 Installing the USB Driver" page 1-24
• Modem mode: This mode is required for monitoring remote ladder
programs via a telephone line and modem using a KV-L20.
• Ethernet port: This port is required for monitoring ladder programs over
Ethernet using the KV-LE20.
7
Select the communications port by the following procedure.
MONITOR
Other procedure
USB port
• Click the button.
Serial port
• Click the button.
Ethernet port
• Click the button.
Important: Make these settings when the Monitor has stopped (not
communicating). Serial port details cannot be set when the monitor is
operating (communicating).
7-20
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
Other procedure
Click the button.
2 Select {Settings
(R)} {Serial port
(S)} from the
Monitor menu.
Serial Port COM
Setup dialog box is
displayed.
MONITOR
Sets the baud rate (transmission speed).
Selects the COM port No. to which the cable is selected. Default is "COM1". The
"COM port" refers to the serial port, and the RS-232C interface is used for
COM port
communications. The number of available COM ports varies according to the
model type of the PC to be used.
Select the baud rate from "AUTO", "9600", "19200", "38400" and "57600" in the
case of the KV-10/16/24/40 and from "9600", "19200", "38400" and "57600" in
the case of KV-700. (Baud rates not supported on the PC you are using cannot
Baud rate be set.) The default baud rate for KV-10/16/24/40 is "AUTO", and for KV-700 is
"38400". The "baud rate" refers to the transmission speed, and expresses the
number of bits that can be sent per second. The larger the baud rate, the faster
data can be sent.
Note: If the COM port selected in the Serial Port COM Setup dialog box is not
displayed or the number of currently displayed COM ports is less than the
actual number of COM ports, Windows may not be correctly recognizing
the COM port. Set Windows so that it correctly recognizes the COM port.
Either refer to the User's Manual for the PC you are using or contact your
dealer.
7-21
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
Important: • The unit No. can be set when the Monitor has stopped (i.e. not
communicating), and "2 Serial port" is selected as the
communications port.
7 • The unit No. cannot be selected when the monitor is operating (i.e.
communicating) or when a port other than "2 Serial port" is selected
as the communications port.
MONITOR
[Tip]
The unit No. is the No. set at "Node No." in the KV-L20 Setup window in Unit
Editor.
"KV-L20 User's Manual"
"Chapter 5 Unit Editor" page 5-1
Note: The unit No. can be specified as 0 to F at the "Unit No." setting. However,
only 0 to 9 can be set in Unit Editor.
7-22
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
Modem Communications
In the Modem mode, remote PLCs are monitored. Also, refer to the KV-L20 Multi-
communications Unit User's Manual.
MONITOR
Initializing the modem
Set the modem's initialization command and type of telephone line before you start
communicating.
Set each of these in "PC modem setup" and "KV-L20 modem setup" described
below.
"KV-L20 User's Manual"
PC modem setup
Settings (R) Modem setup (T) PC modem setup (P)
1 Select {Settings (R)} {Modem setup (T)} {PC modem setup (P)} from
Menu.
The PC side modem setup dialog box is displayed.
7-23
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
• Click the "Register" button after entering the initialization command when
registering a new initialization command.
PLC type • Select a currently connected modem when it is already registered.
• Click the "Delete" button after selecting the modem to delete the currently
registered modem.
Enter the modem initialization command. This command differs according to the
7 Initialize
type of modem.
MONITOR
[Tip]
• Initialization commands
"AT commands" are commands for controlling modem operation. All AT
commands are prefixed by "AT".
AT commands are used on KV BUILDER or KV-L20 to control the modem.
To use a modem, use AT commands to make settings so that data
transactions are handled correctly between the PLC and the modem at the
communications destination. This setting is called the "initialization
command." The initialization command varies according to the modem.
7-24
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
[Tip]
• General AT commands
AT commands sometimes differ according to the type of modem. Be sure to
check the AT commands listed in the User's Manual of the modem you are to
use.
AT command Description
E0 Echoback OFF
Q0 Return result code.
V1 Return result code as alphabet.
&C0 Turn ON CD only at carrier detection.
&S0 Always turn DR ON.
&D2 Cut line when ER turns OFF.
¥Q3 Control flow by RS-CS
¥N3 Set to auto-retriable mode.
X3 Busy tone detection (detection of dial tone OFF)
¥J0 Set terminal to fixed speed.
S0=2 Automatic incoming call at 2nd call
%C3 Automatically select MNP Class 5, V.42bis.
7
3 Set the telephone line and other communications settings.
MONITOR
Specifies the type of telephone line.
Important: When it takes a long time for the other modem to respond, the line is
sometimes disconnected before the response is made if you set a
short dial wait time. Be sure to set the dial wait time to a value longer
than the modem response time.
7-25
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
[Tip]
The "OK" button cannot be clicked if the modem type or commands have not
been set. To close the dialog box without changing the settings, click the
"Cancel" button.
1 Make sure that the monitor has stopped (i.e. is not communicating).
2 Select {Settings (R)} {Modem setup (T)} {KV-L20 modem setup (L)}
from Menu.
The Set KV-L20 Modem dialog box is displayed.
• Click the "Register" button after entering the initialization command when
registering a new initialization command.
PLC type • Select a currently connected modem when it is already registered.
• Click the "Delete" button after selecting the modem to delete when
deleting the currently registered modem.
Enter the modem initialization command. This command differs according to
Initialize
the type of modem.
7-26
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
[Tip]
• Initialization commands
"AT commands" are commands for controlling modem operation. All AT
commands are prefixed by "AT".
AT commands are used on KV BUILDER or KV-L20 to control the modem.
To use a modem, use AT commands to make settings so that data
transactions are handled correctly between the PLC and the modem at the
communications destination. This setting is called the "initialization
command." The initialization command varies according to the modem.
• Setting initialization commands
Initialization commands are already registered on the following PLC types.
You can set initialization commands just by selecting the PLC type name from
the PLC pulldown list.
Type Manufacturers Model No. KV-L20 Side PC Side
AIWA PV-BW5610 { {
I/O Data Devices DFML-560E { {
Box
Omron ME5614D { {
Melco IGM-B56KH { {
AIWA PV-JF56E6 —* {
Card
Omron ME5614C/W —* {
* Settings are available on KV-L20 but cannot be used.
Register initialization commands to PLC types that are not pre-registered with
7
initialization commands by the following procedure.
MONITOR
Enter the "AT&F" command (restore defaults command), check for any
differences from the factory settings, and then enter the initialization
command.
You can specify multiple initialization commands by continuously entering the
desired commands.
The following example shows defaults "echoback OFF," "CD ON only at
carrier detection" and "detection of dial tone OFF":
• General AT commands
AT commands sometimes differ according to the type of modem. Be sure to
check the AT commands listed in the User's Manual of the modem you are to
use.
AT command Description
E0 Echoback OFF
Q0 Return result code.
V1 Return result code as alphabet.
&C0 Turn ON CD only at carrier detection.
&S0 Always turn DR ON.
&D2 Cut line when ER turns OFF.
¥Q3 Control flow by RS-CS
¥N3 Set to auto-retriable mode.
X3 Busy tone detection (detection of dial tone OFF)
¥J0 Set terminal to fixed speed.
S0=2 Automatic incoming call at 2nd call
%C3 Automatically select MNP Class 5, V.42bis.
7-27
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
To monitor a remote PLC via a telephone line, set the Modem mode, and call the
modem to which the other PLC is connected to enable communications.
Important: To communicate in the Modem mode, connect the modem to the PC,
and connect the KV-L20 Multi-communications Unit to the modem at
the PLC to be monitored. The modem initialization command and
telephone line type must also be set beforehand.
"Serial port detailed setting7421" page 7-14
"Initializing the modem7432" page 7-17
[Tip]
• To cancel the Modem mode, select {Settings (R)} {1 USB port} or {2 Serial
port} from Menu. The item is unmarked to indicate that the Modem mode is
selected.
• The Modem mode can be selected only when {PLC communications
parameter setup (T)} is selected on Unit Editor, and the Monitor Setup mode
has been started.
7-28
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
3 Select one of
{Monitor/Simulator
(M)} {PLC Monitor
(M)} / {Convert
→Move→Monitor
(W)} / {Read program from PLC (R)} from Menu.
The Line Connection dialog box is displayed.
MONITOR
"Registering peer destinations" page 7-25
Ending communications
End communications by the following procedure.
1 Either select {Monitor (M)} {Exit Monitor (E)} or {File (F)} {Return to
Editor (E)} from Menu.
Disconnects the telephone line, and ends communications.
Other procedure
To end the Monitor
• Click the button.
• Press the F5 key.
To return to the Unit Editor
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F1 keys.
[Tip]
• The telephone line is disconnected and communications ended even if the
Monitor is minimized.
• To start communications again, open the Line Connection dialog box by
{Monitor (M)} {Start Monitor (S)}, and click the "Connect" button.
7-29
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
1 Enter the peer destination's name at "Peer" in the Line Connection dialog
box, and enter the peer destination's telephone No. at "Tel No.".
Enter the name of the peer destination to connect to. One telephone No. can be
Peer
registered to one peer destination.
7 Tel No.
Enter the telephone No. of the peer to connect to.
When external line emission is used, enter only the telephone No. of the peer
destination without entering the external line No.
MONITOR
[Tip]
To enter two or more peer destinations, repeat steps 1 and 2.
7-30
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
Ethernet Communications
This item monitors KV-700s networked over Ethernet (LAN). For details, refer to the
KV-LE20 User's Manual.
KEYENCE KV-700
0 16
1 17
2 18
3 19
4 20
5 21
6 22
7 23
8 24
9 25
10 26
11 27
12 28
HYPER ACCESS WINDOW 13 29
14 30
15 31
RUN
STOP
CARD RD SD USB
SERIAL
KV-LE20 PC 7
MONITOR
Note: • When unit information has been changed, and data is transferred to the
KV-LE20 over Ethernet, data transfer must be executed twice in
succession. Transfer data in the following order:
• When unit information has been changed on Unit Editor, KV-LE20 (KV-
700) is initialized when the unit information is transferred, so
communications is temporarily discontinued. Perform transfer again to
write the remaining data (ladder program).
When the IP address and port No. have been changed on Unit Editor,
communications must be temporarily discontinued, and transfer
performed again on the new IP address and port No.
7-31
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
Setting Ethernet
Settings (R) Ethernet settings (I)
Set communications using Ethernet. For details on the setup on KV-LE20, refer to
the KV-LE20 User's Manual.
1 Select {Settings
(R)} {4 Ethernet
port} from the
Monitor menu.
Ethernet is checked,
and the display
indicates that
Ethernet
communications is
selected.
Other procedure
Click the button.
7 2 Select {Settings
(R)} {Ethernet
settings (I)} from
MONITOR
3 Enter the IP address and port No. of the connection destination KV-700.
[Tip]
Registered connection destinations can be selected from the menu by using Edit
connection destination.
"Editing the Connection Destination" page 7-33
Note: The IP address port No. cannot be changed in the Monitor mode; it can be
changed only in the Editor mode or Setup mode.
7-32
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
1 Select {Settings
(R)} {4 Ethernet
port} from the
Monitor menu.
Ethernet is checked,
and the display
7
indicates that
MONITOR
Ethernet
communications is
selected.
Other procedure
Click the button.
2 Select {Settings
(R)} {Ethernet
settings (I)} from
the Monitor menu.
Ethernet Settings
dialog box is
displayed.
7-33
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
Note: If the connection destination list file is located in another folder, click the
"Browse" button to specify the connection destination list file.
5 Enter the name of the connection destination, IP address and port No.
7-34
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
2 Enter the name of the connection destination, IP address and port No.
MONITOR
Deleting connection destinations list to delete, and click the "Delete"
button.
Delete connection destinations on Ethernet.
7-35
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
Other procedure
Click the button.
7-36
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
3 Enter the IP address and port No. of the connection destination KV-700.
Other procedure
Select the connection
destination to test, and
click the "Select" button. 7
The Ethernet Settings
MONITOR
dialog box for the
selected connection
destination is displayed.
[Tip]
Registered connection destinations can be selected from the menu by using Edit
connection destination.
"Editing the Connection Destination" page 7-33
Note: The IP address port No. cannot be changed in the Monitor mode; it can be
changed only in the Editor mode or Setup mode.
7-37
7-4 Communicating with PLCs
z "Ping" button
The execution results are displayed at Result.
Note: • "Ping" sometimes cannot be used depending on the router setting. For
details, contact the network administrator.
7 • If you find a problem in the execution results, contact the network
administrator, and remedy the problem.
MONITOR
z "Tracert" button
The execution results are displayed at Result.
Note: For details on the execution results, contact the network administrator.
7-38
7-5 Starting Up and Exiting Monitors
[Tip]
When a ladder program is read, it is read to the project folder "PlcMon".
Ladder programs are deleted from this project folder if the Monitor is exited
without saving the ladder program. To save a ladder program, name the program
and save it to the required folder.
MONITOR
procedure.
1 Select {Monitor/Simulator
(M)} {PLC monitor (M)}
from the Unit Editor menu.
The Move Program dialog box
is displayed.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F1 keys.
Note: Be sure to select "Unit setup information" and "Program" setting items to
be read.
7-39
7-5 Starting Up and Exiting Monitors
Writing the ladder program while the PLC is in the Run mode may cause a major
hazard depending on the states of control devices connected to the PLC.
7-40
7-5 Starting Up and Exiting Monitors
1 Set the ladder program window to read the PLC program to the current
window from the Unit Editor screen.
2 Select
{Monitor/Simulator 7
(M)} {Read
program from PLC
MONITOR
(R)} from Menu.
The confirmation
dialog box is displayed.
To cancel reading, click the "No (N)" button.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F5 keys.
7-41
7-5 Starting Up and Exiting Monitors
7
MONITOR
7-42
7-5 Starting Up and Exiting Monitors
Note: • Only the Batch Change and High-speed Time Chart Monitor windows are
displayed in offline device editing. Ladder Monitor, Registration Monitor
and Batch Monitor windows cannot be opened.
• The Batch Change and High-speed Time Chart Monitor windows cannot
be opened if the Monitor Setup mode is started up by selecting
{Monitors/Simulator (M)} {PLC communications parameter setup (T)}
from the Unit Editor menu.
1 Select
{Monitor/Simulator
(M)} {Edit offline
device (D)} from the
Unit Editor menu. 7
The confirmation
dialog box is
MONITOR
displayed.
Other procedure
Click the button.
• To display the data saved by the high-speed time chart, select {Monitor
(M)} {High-speed Time Chart Monitor (H)} from the Monitor menu.
"High-speed Time Chart Monitor" page 7-106
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + H keys.
7-43
7-5 Starting Up and Exiting Monitors
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F1 keys.
[Tip]
To move to monitoring of
the same ladder
program again, select
{Monitor/Simulator (M)}
{Convert
→Move→ Monitor (W)} from the Unit Editor menu.
If the ladder program is the same as the ladder program on the PLC, the screen
moves to the Monitor without the ladder program being transferred.
7-44
7-5 Starting Up and Exiting Monitors
Menu bar
Displays the menu for
executing commands. Main window
Overall monitor screen
Toolbar
The toolbar contains Batch change window
buttons for executing page 7-133
instructions. Only
frequently used Registration Monitor
instructions are window
provided on this page 7-87
toolbar. Clicking a
button executes the
instruction.
Batch Monitor window
page 7-76 7
MONITOR
Unit Monitor window
page 7-116
The names and functions of parts in each of the following windows are as follows:
7-45
7-6 Ladder Monitor
Other procedure
Click the button.
[Tip]
• Only one closed Ladder Monitor window can be opened.
• A Ladder Monitor window cannot be selected when a Ladder Monitor window
is already opened.
7-46
7-6 Ladder Monitor
Cursor
Rung No.
Scroll bar
Step No.
Contact
• To view parts of the window hidden from view, use the scroll bar or
keys.
• When the PLC is set to the Run mode, display of device values and states
changes successively matched to execution of the ladder program.
Cursor movement
key: Moves the cursor.
PageDown PageUp key: Moves the cursor one page (screen) at a time.
Ctrl + key: Moves the cursor one block at a time.
7
Home key: Moves the cursor to the start of the rung.
MONITOR
Esc key: Moves the cursor to the end of the rung.
Important: When the mouse cursor is displayed as , the window size merely
changes and cannot be set to a split screen.
7-47
7-6 Ladder Monitor
Status display
During Ladder Monitor execution, the PLC mode, scan time and other information
are displayed in the status display area of the Monitor window.
Communications indicator
Rotates during communications. The faster the indicator rotates, the faster communications
is being performed. Scan time Baud rate
7 Displays the scan time in 0.1 msec units. Displays the baud rate.
MONITOR
[Tip]
The fewer monitored devices there are, the faster monitoring is performed. If
monitoring is slow, minimize unwanted windows.
7-48
7-6 Ladder Monitor
There are five ways of changing the size at which ladder diagrams are viewed.
When Editor is first started up, the display size is 100%.
Change the view size by the following procedure.
The view size can also be changed in the Change View Mode dialog box.
For details on how to change the view mode, see the item below.
MONITOR
Other procedure
Reducing the view size
Press the Ctrl + PageUp keys.
Enlarging view size
Press the Ctrl + PageDown keys.
7-49
7-6 Ladder Monitor
2 Set the various items referring to the table below, and click the "OK"
button.
To disable the settings and close the dialog box, click the "Cancel" button.
7
MONITOR
Displays at twice (largest display size) the standard size. Select this setting
200%
when text is small and difficult to read.
150% Displays at 1.5 times the standard size.
120% Displays at 1.2 times the standard size.
View size
100% (std) Standard size
Smallest display size. Select this setting to check overall movement when
80% the number of cells that can be displayed in a single screen increases to the
maximum number.
XYM Displays the device name of the ladder diagram by XYM.
Signed decimal constants Displays decimal constants as signed constants in ladder diagrams.
Device label Displays the label name of each device in the ladder diagram.
Comment Displays comments in the ladder diagram.
Grid Displays the grid lines of cells in the edit screen.
Device for units Displays device names in the ladder program by device for unit annotation.
Comment 1 Displays comment 1. (Can be transferred to the PLC.)
Comment
Comment 2 Displays comment 2. (Cannot be transferred to the PLC.)
type
Comment 3 Displays comment 3. (Cannot be transferred to the PLC.)
Editing screen Reflects settings on edit screen of current window.
Mode Browse screen Reflects settings on verify screen of current window.
setup
range Both Reflects settings on both edit screen and verify screen of current window.
All windows Reflects settings on all windows.
* "Current window" refers to the currently selected active window.
7-50
7-6 Ladder Monitor
Display the device name of symbols on the Ladder Monitor expressed as devices
for units by the following procedure.
"Expressing devices for units" refers to expression of relays assigned in Unit Editor
as the "nth terminal of the nth connected unit."
For example, the 5th input relay No. at the input unit next to the CPU is expressed
as "0001-0005" and the 31st relay No. of the 3rd output unit from the CPU is
expressed as "03-00115".
MONITOR
The device name of symbols on the Ladder Monitor are expressed as devices for
units by the following procedure.
Other procedure
Press the Shift + (Space) keys.
7-51
7-6 Ladder Monitor
Toggle between display and hiding of device comments on the Ladder Monitor.
The display comment is "comment 1".
button
Other procedure
7 Press the Ctrl + (Space) keys.
MONITOR
Displaying Labels
View (V) Label (L) Ctrl + Backspace
Display labels instead of device names for symbols on the Ladder Monitor.
Display labels by the following procedure.
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + Backspace keys.
[Tip]
Labels can be used instead of device names when inputting symbols or
finding/replacing symbols. For example, device names can be written as follows
when the label "SW1" is assigned to device 0000:
7-52
7-6 Ladder Monitor
Toolbar
Dialog bar
Status bar
7
MONITOR
Toggle display by the following procedure.
1 Select {View (V)} from Menu, and select the item to view.
Marked: Displayed
Unmarked: Hidden
[Tip]
If you select {Toolbar (T)} when using the KV-700, a more detailed type of tool
bar is displayed.
7-53
7-6 Ladder Monitor
Displaying the Ladder Monitor window at the bottom of the screen ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
View (V) Ladder at bottom (K)
The Ladder Monitor window can be displayed at the bottom of the Registration
Monitor or other windows at all times. If the Ladder Monitor window is set to be
displayed at the bottom at all times, you drag-and-drop devices to register them to
each Monitor even if the Registration Monitor or Batch Monitor windows are
overlapping the Ladder Monitor window.
Set the Ladder Monitor to be displayed at the bottom by the following procedure.
1 Select {View
(V)} {Ladder
at bottom (K)}
from Menu.
Other procedure
Click the button.
[Tip]
To undo this setting, follow the same procedure to unmark the item.
7 Selecting Devices
In the Ladder Monitor window, you can select devices and change their current
MONITOR
Note: When the cursor is displayed gray, key operations on the Ladder Monitor
window are not possible. To move the cursor by the arrow keys, or to turn
devices ON/OFF by the (Space) key, press the Esc key once to cancel
selection of the cursor and then operate the keys.
7-54
7-6 Ladder Monitor
Note: • The ON/OFF states of timer/counter contacts and external I/O relays
cannot be switched.
• Before switching the ON/OFF states of external I/O relays, inhibit input
refreshing.
"Inhibiting input refreshing" page 7-69
1 Move the mouse cursor to the device to turn ON/OFF and click to select.
The contact changes color to indicate that the device ON/OFF state has
changed.
MONITOR
Using keys to turn devices ON/OFF
1 Move the arrow key to the device to turn ON/OFF with the cursor in a
green state, and press the (Space) key.
The contact changes color to indicate that the device ON/OFF state has
changed.
Note: When the cursor is displayed gray, key operations on the Ladder Monitor
window are not possible. To move the cursor by the arrow keys, or to turn
devices ON/OFF by the (Space) key, press the Esc key once to cancel
selection of the cursor and then operate the keys.
7-55
7-6 Ladder Monitor
[Tip]
The shortcut for changing the radix is Ctrl + E .
Each press of the Ctrl + E shortcut key combination toggles between decimal
(#) and hexadecimal ($).
[Tip]
In the case of instructions such as the "LD="
for which a single cell contains multiple
devices, each click of that cell switches the
device to be selected.
2 Change the radix, current value and setting value in the dialog bar.
Radix Current value write button Setting value write button
7-56
7-6 Ladder Monitor
MONITOR
(Registration Monitor for each selected device).
Select type of comment
Comment Comment 1/comment 2/comment 3/none
to be displayed.
Wr current
Enter current value. Up to 17 digits (32 bits) can be entered.
value
Can be set only in case of timers and counters. Up to 17 digits (32
Value Enter setting value.
bits) can be entered.
[Tip]
• Of the number of bits and radix settings, the number of bits is given priority.
(For example, if the number of bits is changed to "1" with the number of bits set
to "16" and the radix set to "decimal," the radix is changed to "binary.")
• In the case of both 16-bit and 32-bit bit devices, only numbers whose
lowermost two digits are "00" can be registered.
• When Bit is set to "32", the 16 bits lower than an even-numbered device No.
becomes the upper 16 bits.
• The "Reset" button is displayed only when timers or counters are selected.
• Bit value devices are reset when PLC operation is executed even if the
ON/OFF state of bit devices or current values or setting values are changed
with PLC operation stopped. If this happens, change the state of the devices
during program operation.
• Timer and counter setting values cannot be changed when the program is
write-protected.
Canceling settings
7-57
7-6 Ladder Monitor
7 [Tip]
This item can be selected only when the Ladder Monitor is active.
MONITOR
1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Rung/step No. (L)} from Menu.
The Rung/Step No. dialog box is displayed.
[Tip]
• To cancel a jump, click the "Jump" button.
• The final rung or step is displayed if you specify a No. greater than the final
rung No. or step No.
7-58
7-6 Ladder Monitor
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + Home keys.
7
Jumping to bottom rung
MONITOR
1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {End (B)} from Menu.
The cursor jumps to the bottom of the ladder diagram.
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + End keys.
7-59
7-6 Ladder Monitor
1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Previous block (P)} from Menu.
7
MONITOR
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + keys.
Note: You cannot jump to the previous circuit block from the comment rung.
1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Next block (N)} from Menu.
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + keys.
Note: You cannot jump to the next circuit block from the comment rung.
7-60
7-6 Ladder Monitor
Jump to the symbol following or preceding the symbol where the cursor is currently
located by the following procedure.
1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Previous symbol (W)} from Menu.
MONITOR
Other procedure
Press the Shift + Tab keys.
Note: You cannot jump to the previous symbol from the comment rung.
1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Next symbol (F)} from Menu.
Other procedure
Press the Tab key.
Note: You cannot jump to the next symbol from the comment rung.
7-61
7-6 Ladder Monitor
1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Top of rung (H)} from Menu.
7
MONITOR
Other procedure
Press the Home key.
1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {End of rung (E)} from Menu.
Other procedure
Press the End key.
7-62
7-6 Ladder Monitor
1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Change: Prev block (O)} from Menu
MONITOR
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + keys.
1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Change: Next block (Q)} from Menu.
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + keys.
7-63
7-6 Ladder Monitor
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + F keys.
Moves the cursor of the searched device.
7
MONITOR
[Tip]
The regular display/reduced display setting for the Search dialog box is saved to
KV BUILDER. For this reason, the setting is enabled when KV BUILDER is next
started up.
[Tip]
To search timer, counter, or high-speed counter instructions, enter the TMR or C
instructions. To search operands, enter T0 or C0.
7-64
7-6 Ladder Monitor
MONITOR
A list of the search results is displayed here.
The cell No. is assigned a number 0, 1, 2, 3 and so forth to 9 from the left edge.
• Rung comments, top rung comment
7-65
7-6 Ladder Monitor
Start communications with the PLC, and display the operating status of the PLC in
each window.
Start the Monitor by the following procedure.
[Tip]
• Monitoring is not possible if a compile (conversion) error occurs. Before you
start Ladder Monitor, make sure that the ladder program you have made can
be compiled (converted) properly.
• When Ladder Monitor is started from Unit Editor, the Monitor is already in a
started state.
7 Other procedure
• Click the (green) button.
MONITOR
Do not disconnect cables connected to the PLC during Monitor execution. Doing so
might cause a communications error or reset the PC.
Other procedure
• Click the (red) button.
• Press the F5 key.
[Tip]
Minimizing each window on the Ladder Monitor automatically stops the Monitor
in that window. The Monitor is automatically resumes by restoring a minimized
window to its original size or maximizing it.
7-66
7-6 Ladder Monitor
MONITOR
7-67
7-7 Setting Up and Operating PLCs
7 Other procedure
• Click the button.
MONITOR
[Tip]
The Run mode can be confirmed by the access window on the PLC lighting
(green).
Note: The KV-700 CPU Unit cannot be operated if the RUN/PROG selector
switch on the CPU Unit is set to PROG.
"KV-700 series User's Manual"
[Tip]
The Run mode can be confirmed by the access window on the PLC lighting
(red).
7-68
7-7 Setting Up and Operating PLCs
MONITOR
• The inhibit input refreshing setting is valid on all external input relays.
• The inhibit input refreshing setting becomes invalid when the PLC operation
mode is changed from Program to Run, or the power is turned OFF then ON
again.
Inhibit output
PLC (P) Inhibit output (O)
When output is inhibited, output from external output terminals is not performed
even if the ladder program is executed.
Set this item if actual output of output relays will cause the external load to
malfunction, for example, in debugging of ladder programs using an actual test
machine.
Set output inhibit by the following procedure.
[Tip]
• The inhibit output setting is valid on all external outputs.
• The inhibit output setting becomes invalid when the PLC operation mode is
changed from Program to Run, or the power is turned OFF then ON again.
7-69
7-7 Setting Up and Operating PLCs
7-70
7-7 Setting Up and Operating PLCs
MONITOR
Click the item to set. Set by the / buttons.
The selected item is displayed inverted.
7-71
7-7 Setting Up and Operating PLCs
[Tip]
The message "Cannot execute unless
switched to PROG. Switch to PROG?" is
displayed if the PLC operation mode is
the Run mode when clearing a device.
To clear all devices after setting the
Program mode, click the "Yes" button. To
cancel clearing of all devices, click the "No" button.
7-72
7-8 Batch Monitor
MONITOR
device is selected.
[Tip]
A new window is opened each time that this operation is executed.
[Tip]
If the Batch Monitor window is opened when a device has not been selected by
the cursor, the window is opened for the device displayed in the dialog bar.
7-73
7-8 Batch Monitor
Registering Devices
Display devices can be changed if a device is registered on an already displayed
Batch Monitor. There are two ways of registering devices:
• By dragging the device from the Ladder Monitor window
• By specifying the device in the dialog bar
1 Select the device to display in the Ladder Monitor window and keep the
mouse down in a clicked state.
The mouse cursor shape changes as shown below.
7
MONITOR
Drag
7-74
7-8 Batch Monitor
• Device type
• Device No.
• Number of bits
• Radix
• Comment display mode
• Current value
• Setting value (possible only on timers and counters)
MONITOR
[Tip]
• The Tab key moves the cursor in the forward direction, while the Tab + Shift
keys move the cursor in the backward direction.
• The key functions as follows:
When the cursor is at Type or No.: New values are registered.
When the cursor is at bit, radix or comment: Values are written to the current
device.
• When the type is selected by "R" (relay) or "DM" (data memory) when the KV-
700 is used, and the No. button is clicked, a list of relays and data
memories currently assigned to each unit is displayed. Select the desired relay
or data memory from the list to monitor relays or data memory for each unit.
Canceling settings
7-75
7-8 Batch Monitor
Setting value
• To view hidden parts of the display, use the scroll bar or the PageUp or PageDown
keys.
• You can move the cursor using the keys.
• The current values change in keeping with Monitor execution.
1 Click the Batch Monitor window to save to make it the current window.
7-76
7-8 Batch Monitor
3 Specify the folder (directory) to save the window to and the file name.
MONITOR
Specify the folder (directory) to which the Batch Monitor window is to be saved. Normally,
Save in (I)
the project folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the monitor window to be saved.
Save as type (T) Specify "Batch monitor (*.kal)".
Note: Current values and setting values are not saved. To save these values, use
batch change.
"7-13 Batch Change" page 7-132
[Tip]
The file is automatically appended with the extender ".kal" when the file name is
set even if it is not specified when the file name is entered.
7-77
7-8 Batch Monitor
3 Specify the folder (directory) to read the file from and the file name.
7
Specify the folder (directory) to which the Batch Monitor window is saved. Normally, the
MONITOR
Look in (I)
project folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the monitor window to be read.
Files of type (T) Specify "Batch monitor (*.kal)".
7-78
7-8 Batch Monitor
Selecting devices
Select devices by the following procedure.
MONITOR
Using keys to select devices
1 Move the cursor to the device to select using the keys with the
cursor the same color as the title bar, and press the key.
The cursor turns gray to indicate that the device is selected
7-79
7-8 Batch Monitor
1 Move the cursor to the device whose state is to be turned ON/OFF, and
double-click the device.
This switches the ON/OFF display of the device.
ON state OFF state
Double-click
1 Move the cursor to the device whose is to be turned ON/OFF using the
7 keys with the cursor the same color as the title bar, and press the
space bar.
MONITOR
Other procedure
Move the cursor to the device whose is to be turned ON/OFF using the
keys with the cursor the same color as the title bar, and press the space bar.
7-80
7-8 Batch Monitor
• Device type
• Device No.
• Number of bits
• Radix
• Comment display mode
• Current value
• Setting value (possible only on timers and counters)
• Resetting of timer/counter current value
1 Make the Monitor window in which to change device settings the current
window.
MONITOR
2 Move the cursor to the device to be changed and click the device.
3 Change the radix, comment, current value and setting value on the dialog
bar.
Current value write button
Radix Comment Setting value write button
[Tip]
• The Tab key moves the cursor in the forward direction, while the Tab + Shift
keys move the cursor in the backward direction.
• The key functions as follows:
When the cursor is at Type or No.: New values are registered.
When the cursor is at bit, radix or comment: Values are written to the current
device.
7-81
7-8 Batch Monitor
Select current value of *4 Values are expressed as signed binary (2's complement).
Rad device/display method *5 This can be set only when KV-700 is used.
(Hex/Bin) of setting value.
• When the bit is set to "1", the radix can be changed to other
than "2".
• Changes made to radix are reflected to the overall window
(Registration Monitor for each selected device).
Select type of comment to
Comment Comment 1/comment 2/comment 3/none
be displayed.
Wr current
Enter current value. Up to 17 digits (32 bits) can be entered.
value
Can be set only in case of timers and counters. Up to 17 digits (32
Value Enter setting value.
bits) can be entered.
[Tip]
• Of the number of bits and radix settings, the number of bits is given priority.
(For example, if the number of bits is changed to "1" with the number of bits set
to "16" and the radix set to "decimal," the radix is changed to "binary.")
• In the case of both 16-bit and 32-bit bit devices, only numbers whose
lowermost two digits are "00" can be registered.
• When Bit is set to "32", the 16 bits lower than an even-numbered device No.
becomes the upper 16 bits.
• The "Reset" button is displayed only when timers or counters are selected.
• Bit value devices are reset when PLC operation is executed even if the
ON/OFF state of bit devices or current values or setting values are changed
with PLC operation stopped. If this happens, change the state of the devices
during program operation.
• Timer and counter setting values cannot be changed when the program is
write-protected.
7-82
7-8 Batch Monitor
Canceling settings
1 Click the "Cancel" button on the dialog bar.
[Tip]
Resetting devices resets only the device on the rung containing the cursor. To
reset all devices, select {PLC (P)} {Clear all devices (L)} {Clear all DMs
(D)} / {Clear all hold relays (H)} / {Clear all counters (C)} from Menu.
"Clear All Devices" page 7-72
7
1 Click the device to be reset.
MONITOR
This selects the device.
7-83
7-9 Registration Monitor
7
Note: Time charts do not operate according to the scan time of the PLC. Also,
MONITOR
Other procedure
Click the button.
[Tip]
A new window is opened each time that this operation is executed.
7-84
7-9 Registration Monitor
Registering Devices
To monitor devices by Registration Monitor, devices must first be registered. There
are two ways of registering devices:
[Tip]
A new window is opened each time that this operation is executed.
7
2 Select the device to display in the Ladder Monitor
window, and keep the mouse down in a clicked
MONITOR
state.
The mouse cursor shape changes.
[Tip]
If you click the mouse with the Ctrl key held down, the mouse cursor changes
shape to , and all devices displayed in the screen can be registered to
Registration Monitor.
[Tip]
Initially, the time chart is displayed. To display comments, select the type of
comment by [Comment] on the dialog bar.
7-85
7-9 Registration Monitor
• Device type
• Device No.
• Number of bits
• Radix
• Comment display mode
• Current value
• Setting value (possible only on timers and counters)
[Tip]
• The Tab key moves the cursor in the forward direction, while the Tab + Shift
keys move the cursor in the backward direction.
• The key functions as follows:
When the cursor is at Type or No.: New values are registered.
When the cursor is at bit, radix or comment: Values are written to the current
device.
• When the type is selected by "R" (relay) or "DM" (data memory) when the KV-
700 is used, and the No. button is clicked, a list of relays and data
memories currently assigned to each unit is displayed. Select the desired relay
or data memory from the list to monitor relays or data memory for each unit.
Canceling settings
7-86
7-9 Registration Monitor
• If many devices have been registered, you can display them more easily by
opening multiple windows.
• The vertical cursor on the time chart can be moved by the keys. 7
• When Registration Monitor is executed, the current values and time chart
MONITOR
change successively matched to the operation speed.
Note: One gradation on the time chart does not correspond to a single scan.
The gradation is for a single communication sequence on the monitor.
To display a more accurate time chart marked for each scan, use the
High-speed Time Chart Monitor.
"7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor" page 7-106
7-87
7-9 Registration Monitor
7
MONITOR
3 Specify the folder (directory) to save the window to and the file name.
Specify the folder (directory) to which the Registration Monitor window is to be saved.
Save in (I)
Normally, the project folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the monitor window to be saved.
Save as type (T) Specify "Registration Monitor (*.kre)".
Note: Current values/setting values are not be saved. To save these values, use
batch change.
"7-13 Batch Change" page 7-132
[Tip]
The file is automatically appended with the extender ".kre" when the file name is
set even if it is not specified when the file name is entered.
7-88
7-9 Registration Monitor
[Tip]
7
The default is "Registration Monitor".
MONITOR
3 Specify the folder (directory) to read the file from and the file name.
Specify the folder (directory) to which the Registration Monitor window is to be saved.
Look in (I)
Normally, the project folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the monitor window to be read.
Files of type (T) Specify "Registration Monitor (*.kre)".
7-89
7-9 Registration Monitor
Selecting devices
Select devices by the following procedure.
1 Move the cursor to the device to select using the keys with the
cursor the same color as the title bar, and press the key.
The cursor turns gray to indicate that the device is selected
7-90
7-9 Registration Monitor
MONITOR
(Space) key
1 Make the Monitor window in which to change device settings the current
window.
7-91
7-9 Registration Monitor
2 Move the cursor to the device to be changed and click the device.
3 Change the radix, comment, current value and setting value on the dialog
bar.
Current value write button
Radix Comment Setting value write button
[Tip]
• The Tab key moves the cursor in the forward direction, while the Tab + Shift
keys move the cursor in the backward direction.
• The key functions as follows:
When the cursor is at Type or No.: New values are registered.
When the cursor is at bit, radix or comment: Values are written to the current
device.
Note: "Impossible current value." is
7 displayed if illegal data is entered.
MONITOR
7-92
7-9 Registration Monitor
[Tip]
• Of the number of bits and radix settings, the number of bits is given priority.
(For example, if the number of bits is changed to "1" with the number of bits set
to "16" and the radix set to "Decimal," the radix is changed to "Binary.")
• In the case of both 16-bit and 32-bit bit devices, only numbers whose
lowermost two digits are "00" can be registered.
• When Bit is set to "32", the 16 bits lower than an even-numbered device No.
becomes the upper 16 bits.
• The "Reset" button is displayed only when timers or counters are selected.
• Bit value devices are reset when PLC operation is executed even if the
ON/OFF state of bit devices or current values or setting values are changed
with PLC operation stopped. If this happens, change the state of the devices
during program operation.
• Timer and counter setting values cannot be changed when the program is
write-protected.
Canceling settings
MONITOR
Returning timer/counter current values to their defaults
7-93
7-9 Registration Monitor
Only the attributes (number of bits, radix and comments) of other devices can be
copied.
This feature is used to change only attributes to the same as those for other already
existing devices with the device type and Nos. as they are.
Copy device attributes by the following procedure.
Other procedure
7 To copy from the keyboard, select the copy source device, and press the Esc
key.
MONITOR
Other procedure
Select {Monitor (M)} {Registration monitor (M)} {Copy device attribute (C)}.
7-94
7-9 Registration Monitor
Moving devices
Ctrl +
Ctrl +
The device at the currently selected cursor position can be moved to another
position by dragging-and-dropping to change the order of devices.
Move devices by the following procedure.
2 Move the mouse cursor to the device below the position where you want
7
to move it to with the mouse held down (drag).
MONITOR
3 Release the left mouse button (drop).
The selected device is inserted at the mouse cursor position.
Other procedure
Moving devices up
Press the Ctrl + keys.
Moving devices down
Press the Ctrl + keys.
7-95
7-9 Registration Monitor
Deleting devices
Monitor (M) Registration monitor (M) Delete device (D)
Delete the device at the currently selected cursor position by the following
procedure.
Other procedure
Select {Monitor (M)} {Registration monitor (M)} {Delete device (D)} from
Menu.
7-96
7-9 Registration Monitor
Sorting devices
Monitor (M) Registration monitor (M) Sort device (S)
MONITOR
1 Click on Registration Monitor with the right mouse
button.
The menu is displayed.
Other procedure
Select {Monitor (M)} {Registration monitor (M)} {Sort device (S)} from
Menu.
7-97
7-9 Registration Monitor
Resetting devices
Set selected devices to return them to their defaults by the following procedure.
[Tip]
By resetting a device, only the devices on the rung containing the cursor are
reset. To reset all devices, select {PLC(P} {Clear all devices (L)} {Clear all
DMs (D)} / {Clear all hold relays (H)} / {Clear all counters (C)} from Menu.
"Clear All Devices" page 7-72
7
MONITOR
7-98
7-9 Registration Monitor
MONITOR
Time chart is displayed as " " when ON and as " " when Time chart is displayed as " " to indicate that the value has
OFF to indicate that the value has not changed. changed.
Time chart is displayed as " " to indicate that the value has Time chart is displayed as " " to indicate that the value has
not changed. changed.
The time axis on the time chart advances from right to left. In other words, newer
values are displayed as you advance to the right. The cursor on the time chart
expresses the section indicated as the "Current value," and you can change the
position of the current value by moving the cursor.
The gradation of the time chart is unique to the Monitor and is not related to the
scan time.
7-99
7-9 Registration Monitor
[Tip]
• The value where the vertical cursor is located is displayed as the current value.
When there is no vertical cursor, the true current value is displayed. The
current value can be changed and entered when there is no vertical cursor.
The vertical cursor can be made to disappear by clicking the device whose
value is to be changed.
• The vertical cursor disappears when the ON/OFF state of device contacts, or
current values/setting values are changed.
The gradation is located at the top of the time chart, and any number of gradations
can be set within the range 1 to 511.
The default number of gradations is 32 for a single screen.
When contacts turn ON/OFF at long intervals, for example, the time chart can be
made easier to view by adjusting the number of gradations.
Set the number of gradations by the following procedure.
Other procedure
Click the button.
7-100
7-9 Registration Monitor
3 Set the number of gradations within the range 1 to 511. (Default is 32.)
The number of gradations on the time chart changes to the newly set number.
[Tip]
If there are too many gradations and they 7
do not fit inside the window, the message
MONITOR
"Please enter an integer between 1 and
511." will be displayed. If this happens,
either widen the window, or reduce the
number of gradations.
Important: Check the following before you start to print the content of
Registration Monitor.
• Make sure that the printer is connected correctly.
→ Check the connection between the PC and the printer by
referring to the User's Manuals.
• Select {File (F)} {Printer setup (R)} from
Menu, and make sure that the printer is set
correctly.
→ If the printer is not set correctly, correct the
settings to match the printer connected to
the PC.
Preview
File (F) Print preview (V)
Check the contents to be printed in the preview screen by the following procedure.
7-101
7-9 Registration Monitor
7 or 2-page display.
MONITOR
Executing printing
File (F) Print (P)
Execute printing by the following procedure.
1 Make the Registration Monitor window to be printed the current window.
[Tip]
If the Registration Monitor window is not printed properly, check the printer
settings and the printer connection.
7-102
7-10 Custom Monitor
MONITOR
1 Select the window to display from the monitor pulldown list.
The selected Custom Monitor window is displayed to enable monitoring.
[Tip]
The following windows are registered as defaults to Custom Monitor.
7-103
7-10 Custom Monitor
7
Registering Custom Monitors
MONITOR
Windows other than the default windows can be registered by registering Custom
Monitors.
Register Custom Monitors by the following procedure.
7-104
7-10 Custom Monitor
Specify the
"CpuMon2" folder as
it is.
Note: Registration Monitor files (*.kre) in the "CpuMon2" folder under the folder
pre-installed with KV BUILDER are registered as Custom Monitors. These
files cannot be registered as Custom Monitor files if the "File name" and
"File type" are changed.
[Tip]
The file is automatically appended with the extender ".kre" when the file name is 7
set even if it is not specified when the file name is entered.
MONITOR
6 Click the "Save" button.
This saves the Custom Monitor.
7-105
7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor
Features
• High-speed Time Chart Monitor display differs from the Registration Monitor time
chart display in that data can be sampled in real time at almost the scan time of
the PLC.
• Trigger conditions can be set to facilitate setting of traps during debugging.
• Up to 16384 data items can be sampled and saved to file.
• Bit pattern search function enables searching in time charts by ON/OFF
conditions.
Important: High-speed Time Chart Monitor can be used only when "KV-700" or
"KV-700+M" is selected at the PLC type setting.
For this reason, devices that are monitored by High-speed Time Chart Monitor must
be registered to Registration Monitor in advance.
1 Display Registration
Monitor, and register
devices for which High-
speed Time Chart
Monitor is to be
displayed.
"Displaying Registration
Monitor" page 7-84
"Registering Devices"
page 7-74
Other procedure
Click the button.
[Tip]
Devices exceeding 16 devices on the Registration Monitor are discarded. If the
number of devices is less than 16, all devices are registered.
7-106
7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor
MONITOR
(19) Lost area (10) Scroll switch (8) Cursor setting switch
(11) Cursor jump switch
[Tip]
Contacts to be monitored cannot be registered in the High-speed Time Chart
Monitor window. Contacts are registered in the Registration Monitor window. To
change the details of registered contacts, the High-speed Time Chart Monitor
window must be closed, the contacts to be monitored in the Registration Monitor
window must be registered again, and the High-speed Time Chart Monitor
window must be opened again.
7-107
7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor
(4) Cursor A
This cursor is displayed in yellow.
By combining this cursor with cursor B, you can check the timing between
registered devices and response delay.
There are two ways of moving this cursor, by moving the mouse to the cursor
position and dragging or by turning (8) "Cursor setting switch" ON and clicking
the move destination.
Set cursor setting switch to ON, move mouse and click. Move mouse to cursor position, and drag.
7
MONITOR
(5) Cursor B
This cursor is displayed in blue.
By combining this cursor with cursor A, you can check the timing between
registered devices and response delay.
There are two ways of moving this cursor, by moving the mouse to the cursor
position and dragging or by turning (8) "Cursor setting switch" ON and clicking
the move destination.
Set cursor setting switch to ON, move mouse and click. Move mouse to cursor position, and drag.
7-108
7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor
MONITOR
|A-B|: Expresses the distance and time between cursor A
and B.
Lost: Displays the number of lost data from sampled 32
sampling point data.
Max: Displays the maximum number of lost data.
CycleTime: Expresses the mean value of the scan time for each 32
sampling points.
TrigPoint: Displays the position* where the trigger was applied.
[XX/XX/XX XX: XX: XX]: Displays the date that the trigger was applied.
* The position is displayed taking the point when the monitor start switch was
pressed as position 0.
7-109
7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor
7 : Scrolls the time chart screen one half screen to the right.
This switch jumps the cursor to the cursor A, cursor B or cursor trigger position.
[Tip]
The cursor cannot be made to jump if there is no cursor.
7-110
7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor
[Tip]
The overall number of data items that can be sampled in a
single operation by a trigger is 16384. The amount of sampled
data before the trigger is applied decreases as the cursor
moves to the right edge.
MONITOR
(17) Search trigger condition
Searches positions that match the conditions set at (12) "Trigger attribute setup"
and (16) "Trigger conditions".
: Searches leftwards.
: Searches rightwards.
When this button is set to ON, the range of lost data is displayed blank. When
this button is set to OFF, the time chart is displayed with lost data areas
ignored.
With the High-speed Time Chart Monitor, data is sometimes lost due to the
processing capabilities of the PC in use or the scan time of the KV-700. Use
this button to set whether or not to display lost data on screen.
[Tip]
If lost areas are ignored, the number of valid data items increases as only data
that could be sampled is displayed. However, each of the points of cursors A and
B that are displayed in the sampling information display differ from the actual
elapsed time.
When this button is set to ON, the waveform is not displayed during sampling.
As the waveform is not drawn on screen, PC performance increases, which
results in less lost data compared with normal operation.
7-111
7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor
[Example]
If "1ms" is set as the recording cycle when the scan time is 2ms, data is sampled
every "2ms" scan time as the recording cycle set here is shorter than the scan
time.
Note: This setting is cleared by turning the KV-700 ON and OFF, or by switching
between the Run and Program modes. Also, this setting is invalid if the
ladder program contains the fixed scan time setting.
7-112
7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor
Enable (22) "Set fixed scan time running" by the following procedure.
2 Mark the "Use fixed scan" checkbox, and enter the scan time.
MONITOR
3 Click the "Set to PLC" button.
This enables the fixed scan time function.
[Tip]
To disable the fixed scan time function, unmark the "Use fixed scan" checkbox,
and click the "Set to PLC" button.
7-113
7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor
Note: Time charts cannot be saved or read while they are being recorded. Before
saving or reading a time chart, wait for execution of High-speed Time Chart
Monitor to stop
7 2 Specify the folder (directory) and file name to save the time chart to.
MONITOR
Specify the folder (directory) to which the time chart is to be saved. Normally, the project
Save in (I)
folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the time chart to be saved.
Save as type (T) Specify "Time Chart Files (*.tcf)".
[Tip]
The file is automatically appended with the extender ".tcf" when the file name is
set even if it is not specified when the file name is entered.
7-114
7-11 High-speed Time Chart Monitor
MONITOR
the file type.
Specify the folder (directory) to which the time chart to read is saved. Normally, the project
Look in (I)
folder containing the ladder program being monitored is opened.
File name (N) Enter the name of the time chart to be read.
Files of type (T) Specify the "Time Chart Files (*.tcf)".
[Tip]
• Time charts can also be specified by entering the file name and by selecting
the time chart to read with the mouse from the file list.
• Time charts can be read even with the Monitor offline.
"Editing devices offline" page 7-43
• Registration Monitor must be opened before opening Time Chart Monitor to
read a file even if a time chart is being monitored.
7-115
7-12 Unit Monitor
• DMs and relays assigned to each unit can be displayed in the order in which
they were registered.
• Monitoring is simple as display formats and layouts are provided as tem-
plates for each unit.
• Only selected units can be monitored merely by selecting the desired units,
and you need not worry about the assignment status of relays and DMs.
7 Note: Unit Monitor can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is selected at
the PLC type setting.
MONITOR
Connection No. of
unit. Units are
assigned a number
1, 2, 3 and so forth
Unit names
from the unit next to
the KV-700 CPU
unit.
[Tip]
Only currently registered units are displayed in the Unit Monitor pulldown list.
Note: Units enclosed by parentheses "( )" are PLC types not supported by Unit
Monitor. These units will not be displayed in the Unit Monitor window even
if they are selected.
7-116
7-12 Unit Monitor
MONITOR
(6) Word display value (7) "Annotation format selector" button
7-117
7-12 Unit Monitor
7 Name Function
(1) Leading relay No. Displays the leading relay No. assigned to the selected unit. The No. reflects the content
MONITOR
Important: • The "(8) Input time constant" setting cannot be changed on Unit
Monitor.
• When the "(8) Input time constant" setting has been changed while
monitoring on the access window, the new setting will not be re-
flected in the Unit Monitor display. To reflect the new setting in the
Unit Monitor display, close and open the Unit Monitor window again.
7-118
7-12 Unit Monitor
(2) Comment display area (6) Unit information (8) Comparator lower limit value display area
(5) Setting unit (7) Hold button (9) Comparator upper limit value display area
MONITOR
(15) Input capture data display area (16) Input capture lamp button
Name Function
(1) Channel display Indicates the currently displayed channel.
(2) Comment display Displays the device comment of data memory corresponding to the data whose current
area value is displayed.
(3) Current value dis- Displays the data in the current value display mode.
play area
(4) Assigned device Displays the data memory and relay No. currently assigned to the data display, button or
lamp.
(5) Setting unit Displays the unit corresponding to the input signal range when "analog data" is displayed in
the current value display mode.
(6) Unit information Displays the connection No. and PLC name of the currently displayed unit.
(7) Hold button When this button is ON, peak/bottom hold values are stored to special data.
(Note) When operating hold relays in the ladder program, operations from the Unit Monitor
are sometimes impossible.
(8) Comparator lower Display the comparator upper/lower limit values.
limit value display The upper/lower limit values can be changed.
area
To display the latest values, click the (17) "Upper/lower limit value read" button. To write
(9) Comparator upper newly changed values to the CPU, click the (18) "Upper/lower limit value write" button.
limit value display
area
7-119
7-12 Unit Monitor
Name Function
(10) Comparator lower This lamp lights when "special data" is below the comparator lower limit value.
limit lamp ON This lamp is OFF in ladder programs.
state
This lamp is not displayed when the comparator function is not set.
(11) Comparator upper This lamp lights when "special data" is above the comparator upper limit value.
limit lamp ON This lamp is OFF in ladder programs.
state
This lamp is not displayed when the comparator function is not set.
(12) Broken line detec- This lamp lights when the input current is 2mA or less in the 4 to 20mA input signal range.
tion lamp It also lights when the input voltage is 0.5V or less in the 1 to 5V input signal range.
This lamp is OFF in ladder programs.
This lamp is not displayed when the broken line detection function is not set.
(13) Current value dis- This area sets the data to be displayed in the current value display area.
play mode setting A/D conversion data: Values obtained by A/D converting input signals to "0 to 4000/-4000
area to +4000".
Special data: Values obtained by scaling, peak/bottom hold processing and aver-
aging.
Analog data: Value obtained by converting "A/D conversion data" to volt-
age/current values.
(14) Error message Displays error details when errors occur.
display area
7 (15) Input capture data This area displays captured data.
display area
MONITOR
(16) Input capture This lamp lights when input capture data is stored. Trigger inputs are invalid while this lamp
lamp is lit.
This lamp is OFF in ladder programs.
This lamp is not displayed when the input capture function is not set.
(17) "Upper/lower limit Reads comparator upper/lower limit values for all channels from the CPU Unit.
value read" button
(18) "Upper/lower limit Writes the comparator upper/lower limit values for all channels currently displayed in the
value write" but- comparator upper/lower limit value display area to the CPU Unit.
ton (Note) When upper/lower limit values are being written from the ladder program, writing
from the Unit Monitor sometimes is not possible.
(19) "Read settings Updates all items currently displayed in the Unit Monitor to the latest information.
again" button
Note: When a setting is changed after Unit Monitor has started, the new setting is
not reflected in the Unit Monitor window. To reflect the setting, update the
displayed information by the "Upper/lower limit value read" and "Up-
per/lower limit value write" buttons.
7-120
7-12 Unit Monitor
(2) Comment display area (6) Unit information (7) Alarm lower limit value display area
(5) Setting unit (8) Alarm upper limit value display area
MONITOR
Name Function
(1) Channel display Indicates the currently displayed channel.
(2) Comment display Displays the device comment of data memory corresponding to the data whose current
area value is displayed.
(3) Current value dis- Displays the data by the current value display mode.
play area
(4) Assigned device Displays the data memory and relay No. currently assigned to the data display, button or
lamp.
(5) Setting unit Displays the unit corresponding to the input signal range when "analog data" is displayed
by the current value display mode.
(6) Unit information Displays the connection No. and PLC name of the currently displayed unit.
(7) Alarm lower limit Display the alarm upper/lower limit values.
value display but- The upper/lower limit values can be changed.
ton
To display the latest values, click the (17) "Upper/lower limit value read" button. To write
(8) Alarm upper limit newly changed values to the CPU, click the (18) "Upper/lower limit value write" button.
value display but-
ton
(9) Lower limit alarm This lamp lights when "output data" is the alarm upper limit value or less.
lamp This lamp is OFF in ladder programs.
This lamp is not displayed when the upper/lower limit alarm function is not set.
7-121
7-12 Unit Monitor
Name Function
(10) Upper limit alarm This lamp lights when "output data" is the alarm upper limit value or more.
lamp This lamp is OFF in ladder programs.
This lamp is not displayed when the upper/lower limit alarm function is not set.
(11) Current value dis- Sets the data to be displayed to the currently value display area.
play mode setting Output data: Original value (0 to 4000/-4000 to +4000) to be D/A converted
area
Or, value obtained by scaling the original value (when scaling function is used)
Analog data: Value obtained by converting the original value to be D/A converted to volt-
age/current values
(12) Error message Displays error details when errors occur.
display area
(13) "Upper/lower limit Reads alarm upper/lower limit values for all channels from the CPU Unit.
value read" button
(14) "Upper/lower limit Writes the alarm upper/lower limit values for all channels currently displayed in the alarm
value write" but- upper/lower limit value display area to the CPU Unit.
ton (Note) When upper/lower limit values are being written from the ladder program, writing
from the Unit Monitor sometimes is not possible.
(15) "Read settings Updates all items currently displayed in the Unit Monitor to the latest information.
again" button
7 Note: When a setting is changed after Unit Monitor has started, the new setting is
not reflected in the Unit Monitor window. To reflect the setting, update the
MONITOR
7-122
7-12 Unit Monitor
(4) CTC0 set value (1) Operation mode (17) Preset value "Change" button
MONITOR
(13) Preset input indicator indicator button
(21) Error message display (12) "Reset" button (18) Operation enable (20) "Write setting"
area button button
Name Function
(1) Operation mode Displays the operation mode currently selected on Unit Editor.
(2) Present value Displays the count current value.
(3) Preset value Displays the preset value.
Displays comparator setting value 0. Values can also be written to comparator setting
(4) CTC0 set value
value 0.
Displays comparator setting value 1. Values can also be written to comparator setting
(5) CTC1 set value
value 1.
Displays the ring counter upper limit setting value. The ring counter upper limit setting
(6) Ring cntr set val value can also be written. When the ring counter is not used, the background of the nu-
merical value display is gray.
(7) Capture 0 value Display the count value obtained by input capture.
(8) Capture 1 value
(9) Freq cntr val Displays the measurement results when the frequency count mode is used.
(10) Rot spd meas. val Displays the measurement results when the rotation meter mode is used.
(11) Over (under) flow Displays ON/OFF of the overflow relay.
(12) "Reset" button Resets the overflow control relay.
(13) Preset input indica- Displays ON/OFF of external preset inputs.
tor
(14) Enable input indi- Displays ON/OFF of external enable inputs.
cator
(15) OUT indicator Displays ON/OFF of external outputs OUT0 and OUT1 of KV-SC20.
7-123
7-12 Unit Monitor
Name Function
(16) Present value Clicking the present value "Change" button displays the [Change Present Value] dialog box.
"Change" button Clicking the "Write" button in the [Change Present Value] dialog box changes the count
present value.
(17) Preset value Clicking the preset value "Change" button displays the [Change Preset Value] dialog box.
"Change" button Clicking the "Write" button in the [Change Preset Value] dialog box changes the preset
value. Clicking the "Preset" button changes the preset value, and simultaneously executes
the preset operation.
These items turn gray and cannot be used in operations other than preset count and the
enable integration count mode.
(18) Ope enable button Enables count operation. Each press of the button toggles the operation enable relay ON
and OFF.
(19) "Re-load setting" Reads the comparator setting value of the assigned DM and the ring counter setting values
button from KV-SC20.
(20) "Write setting" Writes the setting value to KV-SC20. Settings are updated.
button
(21) Error message Displays the details of the error when an error occurs.
display area
7-124
7-12 Unit Monitor
(1) (6)
(2)
(7)
(3)
(4) (8)
(5) (9)
Name Function
(1) IP address Displays the IP address of the selected KV-LE20. 7
Set this in Unit Editor.
Communications setting
Displays the subnet mask of the subnet to which the selected KV-LE20 belongs.
MONITOR
(2) Subnet
display area
such as DB, connection confirmation tools, or ActiveX controls. 0 means unused. The
maximum value is 8.
(7) Host link Displays the number of sockets used by TCP for communications with the host link. 0
area
7-125
7-12 Unit Monitor
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
7 Name Function
(10) Send count Displays the number of IP packets sent by KV-LE20 to other terminals
MONITOR
Communications (nodes).
state display
area (11) Receive count Displays the number of IP packets received by KV-LE20 from other termi-
nals (nodes).
(12) RX time-out Displays the allowable time until recovery after communications is discon-
tinued. Set time-out in the "RX time-out" field on Unit Editor.
Time setting
display area (13) Keep alive Displays the time interval that the connection established state is moni-
tored (keep alive function) during TCP communications.
Set this in Unit Editor.
(15) (14)
(16)
(17) (24)
(18) (25)
(19) (26)
(20) (27)
(21) (28)
(22) (29)
(23) (30)
7-126
7-12 Unit Monitor
Name Function
(14) Targeted monitor This area is for selecting the target to be monitored.
selection area • When [KV socket] is set to "TCP enabled" on Unit Editor, select which of TCP0 or
TCP1 to monitor.
When [KV socket] is set to "TCP enabled", UDP cannot be selected.
• When [KV socket] is set to "UDP enabled" on Unit Editor, only UDP can be selected.
When [KV socket] is set to "UDP enabled", TCP0 and TCP1 cannot be selected.
• When [KV socket] is set to "Disabled" on Unit Editor, one of TCP0, TCP1 and UDP
cannot be selected, and all items in the KV socket status display area are displayed
gray.
(15) Self port No. Displays the port No. current used by the selected KV-LE20 for communications. The
displayed No. range is 0 to 65535.
(16) Comm dest IP Displays the IP address of the communications destination.
add
(17) Comm dest port Displays the port No. of the communications destination.
No.
(18) Req time-out Displays the time limit from the TCP active open request relay or send/receive relay
turning ON up to completion of processing.
(19) Connection state Displays which state the TCP connection is in.
(20) TX data length Displays the length of the send data in bytes. The maximum value when TCP is used is
KV socket status display area
MONITOR
(22) RX data length Displays the length of the actually received data in bytes. The maximum value when
(res) TCP is used is 400 and when UDP is used is 1472.
(23) RX store dest Displays which (nth) byte in the receive area the received data should be written.
offset
Request Lights while the passive open request relay is ON.
R+0 (TCP0)
R+8 (TCP1)
End Lights while the passive open end relay is ON.
(24) Passive open R+100 (TCP0)
R+108 (TCP1)
End code * The end code is entered after passive open processing ends.
DM+28 (TCP0) When the end code is "0", this means that passive open processing
ended successfully. When the end code is other than "0", an error
DM+448 (TCP1)
has occurred. Remedy the error as required.
Request Lights while the active open request relay is ON.
R+1 (TCP0)
R+9 (TCP1)
End Lights while the active open end relay is ON.
(25) Active open R+101 (TCP0)
R+109 (TCP1)
End code * The end code is entered after active open processing ends. When
DM+29 (TCP0) the end code is "0", this means that active open processing ended
successfully. When the end code is other than "0", an error has
DM+449 (TCP1)
occurred. Remedy the error as required.
* The end code is updated only when the end relay turns ON.
7-127
7-12 Unit Monitor
Name Function
Request Lights while the open request relay is ON.
R+0
End Lights at end of open processing.
(26) Open (UDP) R+100
End code * The end code is entered after open processing ends. When the end
DM+27 code is "0", this means that open processing ended successfully.
When the end code is other than "0", an error has occurred. Reme-
dy the error as required.
Request Lights while the send request relay is ON.
R+2 (TCP0)
R+10 (TCP1)
R+1 (UDP)
End Lights while the send processing end relay is ON.
R+102 (TCP0)
(27) Send
R+110 (TCP1)
R+101 (UDP)
End code * The end code is entered after send processing ends. When the end
DM+30 (TCP0) code is "0", this means that send processing ended successfully.
DM+450 (TCP1) When the end code is other than "0", an error has occurred. Reme-
dy the error as required.
KV socket status display area
DM+28 (UDP)
7 Request Lights while the receive request relay is ON.
R+3 (TCP0)
MONITOR
R+11 (TCP1)
R+2 (UDP)
End Lights when receive processing ends.
R+103 (TCP0)
(28) Receive
R+111 (TCP1)
R+102 (UDP)
End code * The end code is entered after receive processing ends. When the
DM+31 (TCP0) end code is "0", this means that receive processing ended suc-
DM+451 (TCP1) cessfully. When the end code is other than "0", an error has oc-
curred. Remedy the error as required.
DM+29 (UDP)
Request Lights while the close request relay is ON.
R+4 (TCP0)
R+12 (TCP1)
R+3 (UDP)
End Lights when close processing ends.
R+104 (TCP0)
(29) Close
R+112 (TCP1)
R+103 (UDP)
End code * The end code is entered after close processing ends. When the
DM+32 (TCP0) end code is "0", this means that close processing ended success-
DM+452 (TCP1) fully. When the end code is other than "0", an error has occurred.
Remedy the error as required.
DM+30 (UDP)
(30) Opened R+105 (TCP0) Lights while the opened relay is ON.
R+113 (TCP1)
R+104 (UDP)
* The end code is updated only when the end relay turns ON.
Note: When unit settings have been changed, for example, in the access window
after Unit Monitor was started up, those changes are not reflected in Unit
Monitor. To reflect those changes, exit Unit Monitor and start it up again.
7-128
7-12 Unit Monitor
(2)
(8)
(4) (9)
(10)
(5)
(13)
(11) (12)
Name Function
(1) Unit information Displays the connection No. and model name of the currently displayed unit. 7
(2) Channel display Displays the currently displayed channel.
MONITOR
(3) Comment display Displays the device comment of the data memory corresponding to the measurement value
area of the currently displayed channel.
(4) "Details" button Displays the [Detailed view mode] window for the currently displayed channel.
(5) Measurement Displays the measured current temperature.
value display area
(6) Setting value Displays the (target) temperature setting. The setting value can be changed. To display the
display area latest value, click the (12) "Re-load setting" button. To write changed values to the CPU
Unit, click the (13) "Write setting" button.
(7) Output amount Displays the output amount (control output ON percentage).
display area
(8) Control output Displays the control output ON/OFF state.
indicator When OFF: gray
When ON: green
(9) Auto-tuning Displays the auto-tuning state. Lights during auto-tuning.
status indicator When OFF: gray
When ON: green
(10) Alarm output Displays the alarm output ON/OFF state.
indicator When OFF: gray
When ON: yellow
(11) Error message Displays the details of the error when an error occurs.
display area
(12) "Re-load setting" Updates all items currently displayed on the TF40 Unit Monitor and in the [Detailed view
button mode] window to values currently stored on the CPU Unit.
(13) "Write setting" Writes the setting values of all channels currently displayed in (6) Setting value display area
button to the CPU Unit.
(Note) While the [Detailed view mode] window is displayed, setting values that have been
changed in the [Detailed view mode] window are not written to the CPU Unit, and all items
are updated to the latest values currently stored on the CPU Unit. (Setting values in the
process of being changed are lost.) Also, writing on the Unit Editor is not possible while
setting values are being written on the ladder program.
7-129
7-12 Unit Monitor
(3)
(4)
(2)
(1)
(5)
(6)
(8)
(7)
(9) (10)
Name Function
(1) Measurement Displays the measured current temperature.
value display area
7 (2) Setting value
display area
Displays the (target) temperature setting. The setting value can be changed. To display the
latest value, click the (26) "Re-load setting" button. To write changed values to the CPU
Unit, click the (27) "Write setting" button.
MONITOR
(3) Output amount Displays the output amount (control output ON percentage).
display area
(4) Cool output Displays the output amount (control output ON percentage) when heat/cooling control is
amount display used.
area
(5) Control output Displays the control output ON/OFF state.
indicator When OFF: gray
When ON: green
(6) Cooling control Displays the cooling control output ON/OFF state when heat/cooling control is used.
output indicator When OFF: gray
When ON: green
(7) Alarm output Displays the alarm output ON/OFF state.
indicator When OFF: gray
When ON: yellow
(8) Alarm type Displays the action type for alarm output.
display area
(9) Alarm setting Displays the alarm setting temperature for alarm output. The alarm setting value can be
value display area changed. To display the latest value, click the (26) "Re-load setting" button. To write
changed values to the CPU Unit, click the (27) "Write setting" button.
(10) Alarm hysteresis Displays the hysteresis for alarm output.
display area
(13)
(14)
(12)
(11) (19)
(17) (20)
(15)
(18)
(16)
7-130
7-12 Unit Monitor
Name Function
(11) Proportional band Displays the setting value for proportional band (P). The proportional band can be changed. To
display area display the latest value, click the (26) "Re-load setting" button. To write changed values to the
CPU Unit, click the (27) "Write setting" button.
(12) Integration time Displays the setting value for integration time (I). The integration time can be changed. To display
display area the latest value, click the (26) "Re-load setting" button. To write changed values to the CPU Unit,
click the (27) "Write setting" button.
(13) Derivative time Displays the setting value for derivative time (D). The derivative time can be changed. To display
display area the latest value, click the (26) "Re-load setting" button. To write changed values to the CPU Unit,
click the (27) "Write setting" button.
(14) Control cycle dis- Displays the ON/OFF cycle (cycle time) for control output.
play area
(15) Cooling control Displays the ON/OFF cycle (cycle time) for cooling control output during heat/cooling control.
cycle display area
(16) Cooling coefficient Displays the percentage for cooling control output with respect to the heat side during
display area heat/cooling control. The cooling coefficient can be changed. To display the latest value, click the
(26) "Re-load setting" button. To write changed values to the CPU Unit, click the (27) "Write
setting" button.
(17) Auto-tuning state Displays the auto-tuning state. Lights during auto-tuning.
indicator When OFF: gray
When ON: green
(18) "Start Auto-tuning" Clicking this button when its display is OFF starts auto-tuning. Clicking this button when its dis-
button play is ON (auto-tuning in progress), stops auto-tuning.
(19) ON/OFF control Displays the hysteresis for control output during ON/OFF control.
hysteresis display
area
(20) Cooling ON/OFF Displays the hysteresis for control output for cooling control output during heat/cool ON/OFF
hysteresis display control.
area
7
MONITOR
(24)
(22)
(25)
(21)
(26)
(23)
(27)
Name Function
(21) Measurement value Displays the bias temperature to be added to the measurement value. The measurement value
bias display area bias can be changed. To display the latest value, click the (26) "Re-load setting" button. To write
changed values to the CPU Unit, click the (27) "Write setting" button.
(22) Manual reset dis- Displays the output amount compensation value when integrated operation is OFF. This is en-
play area abled and can be changed only when the integration time is set to "0s". To display the latest
value, click the (26) "Re-load setting" button. To write changed values to the CPU Unit, click the
(27) "Write setting" button.
(23) Deadband display Displays the deadband in which heat output and cool output is not performed during heat/cool
area control.
(24) Operation status Displays the status of temperature control operation. Lights when temperature control is in op-
indicator eration.
When OFF: gray
When ON: green
(25) "Start operation" Clicking this button when its display is OFF starts temperature control operation. Clicking this
button button when its display is ON (auto-tuning in progress), stops temperature control operation.
(26) "Re-load setting" Updates all items currently displayed on the TF40 Unit Monitor and in the [Detailed view mode]
button window to values currently stored on the CPU Unit.
(27) "Write setting" Writes all setting values in the currently selected [Detailed view mode] window to the CPU Unit.
button (Note) While the [Detailed view mode] window is displayed, setting values that have been
changed in the [Detailed view mode] window are not written to the CPU Unit, and all items are
updated to the latest values currently stored on the CPU Unit. (Setting values in the process of
being changed are lost.) Also, writing on the Unit Editor is not possible while setting values are
being written on the ladder program.
7-131
7-13 Batch Change
7 Other procedure
Click the button.
MONITOR
[Tip]
• Two or more Batch Change windows can be displayed at the same time.
• The device type that is initially displayed in the Batch Change window is the
device that was selected when the Batch Change window was opened. If the
Batch Change window was opened without a device type selected, data
memory is displayed in the Batch Change window.
7-132
7-13 Batch Change
MONITOR
in the selected range to PLC.
"PLC read" button
Reads the content of devices
from PLC.
[Tip]
• You can move between items by the Tab key (forwards) and the Tab + Shift
keys (backwards).
• Clicking the "×" mark at the top right of the window closes the Batch Change
window.
• "NG" is displayed if an illegal setting value is entered.
• Only one continuous range can be read to a
single Batch Change window. Other ranges
cannot be read at the same time to the same
window. To read a different range, select {File
(F)} {Batch Change (H)} from Menu, open a new Batch Change window,
specify the range of devices on the dialog bar to register the devices, and read
the devices.
• Only the current values of timers and counters can be manipulated. Setting
values cannot be manipulated.
7-133
7-13 Batch Change
1 Make the Batch Change window you want to save the current window.
3 Specify the folder (directory) to save the window to and the file name.
7
MONITOR
Specify the folder (directory) to which the Batch Change window is to be saved. Normally,
Save in (I)
the project folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the Batch Change window to be saved.
Save as type (T) Specify "Batch change (*.kdv)".
[Tip]
• The file is automatically appended with the extender ".kdv" when the file name
is set even if it is not specified when the file name is entered.
• All values of devices selected in a Batch Change window saved to file are
saved regardless of the specified range of devices.
7-134
7-13 Batch Change
2 Select "Batch change (*.kdv)" from the File type pulldown list.
MONITOR
3 Specify the folder (directory) to read the file from and the file name.
Specify the folder (directory) to which the Batch Change window is saved. Normally, the
Look in (I)
project folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the Batch Change window to be read.
Files of type (T) Specify "Batch change (*.kdv)".
7-135
7-13 Batch Change
Note: This item cannot be used if you have specified a device that cannot be
written to the PLC.
[Tip]
You can also specify the range of
devices to write by dragging with the
mouse.
Important: • Only one continuous range can be written to a PLC. Other ranges
cannot be written at the same time to the PLC. To write a different
range, specify the range again, and write that specified range, or
open another Batch Window and write the devices in that window.
• Writing to a PLC takes longer than reading from a PLC.
[Tip]
You can also specify the range of
devices to read by dragging with the
mouse.
[Tip]
In this state, you can use the dialog bar to change attributes (radix, bit values
and comments).
"Changing Current Value/Setting Value/Attributes" page 7-56
7-136
7-13 Batch Change
[Tip]
You can also specify the range of
devices to save by dragging with the
mouse.
7
3 Specify the folder (directory) to save the window to and the file name.
MONITOR
Specify the folder
(directory) to save to.
Specify "Text
Specify the file name. file(*.txt)" or "Comma
delimited file(*.csv)"
as the file type.
Specify the folder (directory) to which the device value file is to be saved. Normally, the
Save in (I)
project folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the device value file to be saved.
To save in text format, specify "Text file (*.txt)", and to save in table format, specify "Comma
Save as type (T)
delimited file (*.csv)".
7-137
7-13 Batch Change
[Tip]
If you use EXCEL or other spreadsheet software, device values can be further
edited to create graphs.
7
2 Execute printing in the software that was used for
MONITOR
7-138
7-13 Batch Change
Specify "Text
Specify the file name. file(*.txt)" or "Comma
delimited file(*.csv)"
as the file type. 7
MONITOR
Specify the folder (directory) to which the device value file is saved. Normally, the project
Look in (I)
folder to which the currently monitored ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the device value file to be read.
To read in text format, specify "Text file (*.txt)", and to read in table format, specify "Comma
Files of type (T)
delimited file (*.csv)".
7-139
7-13 Batch Change
[Tip]
You can also specify the range of
devices to save by dragging with the
mouse.
[Tip]
• To save device values to a new folder, click the "New"
button, and enter the folder name. This creates a new
project folder.
7-140
7-13 Batch Change
[Tip]
You can also specify the range of devices to read by dragging-and-dropping with
the mouse.
1 Click the "Rd MMC" button. 7
The Memory Card dialog box is displayed.
MONITOR
2 Specify the folder to read.
[Tip]
• The Memory Card dialog box
displays the types of devices
and files currently saved to
the selected folder. This
information is displayed using the following abbreviations:
UNIT: Unit setting information
PROG: Ladder program
CMT: Device comments
CPUM: CPU positioning function parameter file
DM: DM values
CM: CM values
R: Relay ON/OFF states
CR: Control relay ON/OFF states
7-141
7-14 Online Edit Functions
Outline of Functions
Online edit functions allow you to change the ladder program directly on the KV
BUILDER monitor screen. These handy functions allow you to change simple
programs or perform site adjustment during final debugging during programming.
Important: Online edit functions can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M"
is selected as the model type.
• The ON/OFF states of devices and changes in values can be checked in real time
7 in the same way as the monitor screen even during while in online edit.
→ Debugging while checking the operating status of devices is possible in real
time.
MONITOR
• Edit locations are displayed in light blue so that you can instantly check which cell
has been corrected.
→ Changes can be performed easily, for example, if devices are found not to be
operating normally as a result of a change.
• All screens can be edited while in online edit.
→ Even when setting interlocks to two or more circuits, editing is possible as if
you are in the Editor mode without switching the edit circuit.
As the online edit function changes program while the PLC is in the Run mode,
equipment may be seriously damaged or personnel may be seriously injured if
online edit is used in the wrong way. Thoroughly check the following points to
ensure correct used of this function:
• Before using online edit, thoroughly check the peripheral equipment, and use in a
state that will prevent physical injury or damage if equipment operate
unexpectedly.
• Do not add circuits (e.g. execution condition B contact circuits) that operate
immediately after a program is transferred. Doing so might cause equipment to
run away.
• Do not delete outputs that are ON. Doing so might cause hold the output in an ON
state.
7-142
7-14 Online Edit Functions
Important: • Online edit functions cannot be used while Monitors are stopped.
• If a Monitor is forcibly ended due to a personal computer error
during online editing or transfer of the ladder program, ladder
programs that have not been transferred to the main unit are
discarded.
• When a rewrite is made in the Run mode, device comments are not
transferred.
• Some of the shortcut key assignments changes from those in the
Monitor mode.
• The ON/OFF states and values of devices currently monitored
during online editing, are displayed based on the ladder program
(program currently running on KV-700) before online editing was
started. Up till transfer, operation is such that program states
currently being edited by online editing are not reflected. To run on a
program after adding or changing by online editing, transfer must be
performed.
MONITOR
program window changes to
"Ladder Monitor Online edit
in progress" from "Ladder
Monitor" to indicate that
online edit is active.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F10 key.
[Tip]
Even during online editing, the ON/OFF states and values of devices continue to
be monitored in real time.
7-143
7-14 Online Edit Functions
Online
Menu Item Editor
Editing
Edit Undo, Redo { {
Instruction input { {
CPU positioning instruction { {
Instruction palette/Change operand { {
Cut, Copy, Paste { {
Insert free rung { {
Delete rung { {
Edit connecting line { ×
Edit list { ×
Comment Edit comment/label { ×
Edit rung comment { {
Rung comment set/release { {
7 Read other file comments { ×
Read/save comments in text format { ×
{ ×
MONITOR
Change label
Change comment { {
Comment move setup { ×
Find/Replace Jump { {
Jump to change block × {
Find { {
Replace operand, Replace range { ×
NO/NC { ×
Use status { {
Convert Convert { ×
Redundant coil check { ×
Clear invalid operands { ×
Error display { ×
View Instruction palette { {
Circuit library { {
Tools Extended ladder mode { {
Unit Editor { ×
Unit Viewer { {
Edit CPU positioning parameters { {
Help Editor Help { {
7-144
7-14 Online Edit Functions
Transfer the ladder program edited by online editing to the main unit.
MONITOR
Cannot transfer." is displayed. Click the "OK" button to display a list of errors.
Eliminate the cause of the error, and execute program transfer again.
2 Specify the details in the program to transfer and the transfer mode.
This displays the Move Program
dialog box. Specify the items to
transfer to the PC main unit. If the
PLC main unit is in the Run mode,
select whether to transfer in the
Program mode or to write while in the
Run mode.
• "Move in program mode"
checkbox not marked
The ladder program and CPU
positioning parameters are written
with the PLC in the Run mode. Unit setup information and contact comments
cannot be transferred. Until writing ends, the program before transfer
continues to be executed.
• "Move in program mode" checkbox marked
PLC operation is stopped, and the program is written in the Program mode.
7-145
7-14 Online Edit Functions
Other procedure
• Click the button.
2
MONITOR
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F1 keys.
7-146
7-14 Online Edit Functions
Other procedure
Press the F12 key.
2 Select the timing to clear the background color for the program change
display. 7
The background color is cleared at the timing of the item whose checkbox you
MONITOR
marked.
Item Description
Auto (monitor → Online Edit) Clear the change background color when the
monitoring state is switched to online editing.
Auto (monitor → Editor) Clear the change background color when the
monitoring state is switched to the Editor.
Note: If a checkbox is not marked, the background color for the program change
display is not cleared. For this reason, manually clear the background color.
To manually clear the background color, select {View (V)} {Clear back
color of changes (U)}.
"Clearing the Background Color in Program Change Display" page 7-148
3 When you have finished the setting, click the "OK" button.
This closes the Set Online Edit Setup dialog box.
7-147
7-14 Online Edit Functions
Note: When automatic clear is set in the online editing settings, the background
color is automatically cleared to the program change display. To set
automatic clear, select {Online Edit (O)} {Settings (S)} from Menu.
"Setting Clearing of Program Change Display" page 7-147
1 Select {View (V)} {Clear back color of changes (U)} from Menu.
This clears the background color for the program change display.
7
MONITOR
7-148
Chapter 8
SIMULATOR
This chapter describes the functions of Simulator, and how to use Simulator,
Ladder Monitor, Batch Monitor and Registration Monitor.
Outline of Functions
"Simulator" simulates operation of ladder programs you create on Editor without
actually connecting to a PLC.
Simulator enables you to perform the following operations:
Simulator Restrictions
8 Common restrictions
• The high-speed counter is not supported on Simulator.
SIMULATOR
8-2
8-1 Outline of Simulator Functions
SIMULATOR
2405
2405 OFF OFF ON ON
Rising edge Falling edge Both edges
2410*
INT2 interrupt polarity 2410 OFF ON OFF ON
2411
2411 OFF OFF ON ON
Rising edge Falling edge Both edges
2412*
INT3 interrupt polarity 2412 OFF ON OFF ON
2413
2413 OFF OFF ON ON
* Supported only when KV-10/16/24/40 is used
8-3
8-1 Outline of Simulator Functions
8-4
8-1 Outline of Simulator Functions
SIMULATOR
INT1 interrupt polarity CR2404 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2405
CR2405 OFF OFF ON ON
Rising edge Falling edge Both edges
CR2410
INT2 interrupt polarity CR2410 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2411
CR2411 OFF OFF ON ON
Rising edge Falling edge Both edges
CR2412
INT3 interrupt polarity CR2412 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2413
CR2413 OFF OFF ON ON
CR3502 Zero suppress setting of DASC instruction
CR3503 + signed abbreviated setting of DASC instruction
* CR devices other than the above are the same as internal auxiliary relays on the Simulator.
8-5
8-1 Outline of Simulator Functions
Device State
Relay OFF
CR2002: ON
CR
Other: OFF
DM 0
CM 0
TM 0
Contact: OFF
T Registered items: Current value is same as setting value.
Unregistered items: Current value 0
Contact: OFF
C
Current value: 0
CTH Current value: 0
CTC Contact: OFF
8-6
8-2 Outline of Tool Bar Functions
Standard
The following table lists icons displayed on the tool bar that visually represent
frequently performed operations on Simulator.
Return to Editor Exits the Simulator and returns to the Editor screen. 8-15
Display at bottom of Displays the Ladder Monitor at the bottom of the screen regardless of
8-36
Ladder Monitor display/hide state.
Ladder Monitor Opens the Ladder Monitor window. 8-29
Enlarge display Enlarges the display ratio of the ladder diagram. 8-31
Reduce display Reduces the display ratio of the ladder diagram. 8-31
Execute reverse
continuous scan
Continuously performs step execution in the reverse direction. 8-26
8
Execute reverse single
Executes one program step (one instruction) in the reverse direction. 8-26
step
SIMULATOR
Execute single step Executes one program step (one instruction). 8-23
Execute continuous
Continuously performs step execution. 8-24
scan
High-speed step
Performs step execution instantaneously to the specified step. 8-25
execution
Pause Pauses Simulator operation. (PAUSE) 8-28
Execute single scan Executes the program for one scan. 8-17
Execute continuous
Executes the program continuously. (RUN) 8-16
scan
Break conditions Sets stop conditions for continuous scan/continuous stop execution. 8-18
Set time chart Sets the number of graduations in the time chart display on the
8-75
graduations Simulator.
Reset Resets all devices on the Simulator. 8-28
8-7
8-3 Outline of Menu Functions
File
This menu groups file operations and printing related items.
8 Ladder Monitor
Item
Opens the Ladder Monitor window.
Function See page
8-29
Registration Monitor Opens the Registration Monitor window. 8-59
SIMULATOR
8-8
8-3 Outline of Menu Functions
Search
This menu groups search items on the Ladder Monitor.
SIMULATOR
Next symbol Moves to the symbol following the current cursor position. 8-43
Moves the cursor to the start of the rung at the current cursor
Top of rung 8-44
position.
Moves the cursor to the end of the rung at the current cursor
End of rung 8-44
position.
Find Opens the Find dialog box for searching for devices. 8-45
8-9
8-3 Outline of Menu Functions
Run
This menu groups items relating to operations on Simulator.
8 1 scan
Cont step
Executes the program for one scan.
Continuously performs step execution.
8-17
8-24
1 step Executes one program step (one instruction). 8-23
SIMULATOR
High-speed step Performs step execution instantaneously to the specified step. 8-25
Back cont step Continuously performs step execution in the reverse direction. 8-26
Back 1 step Executes one program step (one instruction) in the reverse direction. 8-26
Pause Pauses Simulator operation. (PAUSE) 8-28
Stop Stops Simulator operation. (PROGRAM) 8-28
Reset Resets all devices on the Simulator. 8-28
Clear all DMs Clears all currently held DM (data memory) values to "0". 8-47
Clear all
devices
Clear all hold relays Clears all relays currently held at a power interruption to "0". 8-47
Clear all counters Clears all currently values of currently held counters to "0". 8-47
8-10
8-3 Outline of Menu Functions
Settings
This menu groups the various settings on Simulator.
Sort devices Sorts the registered devices on the Registration Monitor. 8-71
monitor
SIMULATOR
setup Monitor.
Resets the registered devices on the Batch Monitor or Registration Monitor
Reset devices in monitors 8-72
to their defaults.
Wait time Sets the operation wait time. 8-20
Scan time Sets the scan time. 8-21
Watchdog timer Sets the watchdog timer. 8-22
8-11
8-3 Outline of Menu Functions
View
This menu groups items that are used when creating ladder diagrams.
Important "Devices for units" can be used only when "KV-700" or "KV-700+M" is
selected at the PLC type setting.
Ladder at bottom Displays the Ladder Monitor window always at the bottom. 8-36
Enlarge Enlarges the ladder display ratio. 8-31
Reduce Reduces the ladder display ratio. 8-31
Label Displays devices in the ladder program as labels. 8-34
Comment Displays devices in the ladder program with device comments. 8-34
Device for units Displays devices in the ladder program in device for unit annotation. 8-33
Window
This menu groups items relating to display of the ladder window.
8-12
8-3 Outline of Menu Functions
Help
This menu groups Help such as how to operate KV BUILDER and how to use
instructions.
SIMULATOR
8-13
8-4 Starting Up and Exiting Simulator
1 Display the ladder program to be simulated in the Editor, and make it the
current window.
8
2 Select {Monitor/Simulator (M)} {Simulator (S)} from Menu.
SIMULATOR
This displays the Simulator screen and the ladder program that was displayed
on Unit Editor.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F2 keys.
Note: Simulator will not start if a conversion error occurs. Correct the erroneous
section of the ladder program to eliminate the conversion error, and restart
Simulator.
"Displaying Errors" page 6-142
[Tip]
When Simulator is run on a previously executed ladder program, Simulator starts
up in the previous window display state.
8-14
8-4 Starting Up and Exiting Simulator
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Ctrl + F1 keys.
SIMULATOR
currently being simulated.
Overall Simulator screen
Menu bar
Displays the menu for
executing commands.
Ladder Monitor window
page 8-29
Toolbar
The toolbar contains
Batch Monitor window
buttons for executing
page 8-48
instructions. Only
frequently used
instructions are Registration Monitor window
provided on this page 8-59
toolbar. Clicking a
button executes the
instruction.
The following describes the names of parts of each window and their functions.
• Ladder Monitor window page 8-29
• Batch Monitor window page 8-48
• Registration Monitor window page 8-59
8-15
8-5 Executing Simulator
Scan Execution
This section describes scan execution.
8-16
8-5 Executing Simulator
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F5 key.
Executes the program for one scan only. When single scan execution is performed
when a continuous scan is executed, operation is paused.
Executing a single scan enables you to check operation involving detailed operation
so that ladder functions can be checked the moment that specific relays turn ON.
SIMULATOR
Execute a single scan by the following procedure.
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the F9 key.
8-17
8-5 Executing Simulator
AND and OR conditions can be set. The default break condition is OR. To set an
AND condition, first select {OR conditions (O)} to unmark the OR condition.
[Tip]
AND and OR conditions can also be selected from the
8 shortcut menu. To display this menu, click on the break
condition window with the right mouse button.
SIMULATOR
Bit devices
Device name Specifies the device name.
ON Takes contact ON as the break condition.
Conditions
OFF Takes contact OFF as the break condition.
Word devices
Device name Specifies two device names.
Takes "righthand device greater than lefthand
<
device" as the break condition.
Takes "lefthand device equal to righthand device"
=
as the break condition.
Compare Takes "lefthand device greater than righthand
>
conditions device" as the break condition.
Takes "righthand device greater than and equal
≦
to lefthand device" as the break condition.
Takes "lefthand device greater than and equal to
≧
righthand device" as the break condition.
8-18
8-5 Executing Simulator
6 When you finished registering all break conditions, click the "End"
button.
The Register break conditions dialog box is closed.
SIMULATOR
Settings (R) Delete break conditions (B)
1 Move the cursor to the break condition to set and double-click.
The Register/change break conditions dialog box is displayed.
[Tip]
New break conditions can be registered by clicking the "Register" button.
Other procedure
• Move the cursor to the break condition to be deleted, and select {Settings (R)}
{Delete break conditions (B)} from the menu.
• Move the cursor to the break condition to be deleted, and press the Delete key.
8-19
8-5 Executing Simulator
Other procedure
Click the button.
2 Set the wait time within the range 0 to 10000 ms. (Default is 90 ms.)
8
Set the wait time.
SIMULATOR
8-20
8-5 Executing Simulator
Other procedure
Click the button.
SIMULATOR
Set the scan time.
Note: The value set at Scan time is not enabled when the Fixed scan checkbox is
not marked.
[Tip]
Default is 10 msec during step execution. During scan execution, the scan time
is the actual time that it takes to perform scan execution.
8-21
8-5 Executing Simulator
Important: A watchdog error occurs when the scan time exceeds "watchdog
timer setting value" + "wait time."
8 2 Enter a watchdog timer value within the range 500 (0.5 seconds) to 5000
(5 seconds) msec.
SIMULATOR
Note: The performance of the PC you are using sometimes causes the scan time
to increase even on normal ladder programs, which causes the watchdog
error to occur. If this error occurs, try setting the watchdog timer to a larger
value.
Step Execution
This section describes step execution.
Outline of step execution function
"Step execution" is the simulation of the ladder program one instruction at a time.
During step execution, mnemonics are displayed and you can check the currently
executing rung of the ladder program.
You can also view the operating status of programs from a specified input through to
output by specifying break conditions or setting breakpoints together with step
execution. This allows you to find bugs faster. With programs comprising a
combination of multiple arithmetic calculation instructions, this is useful for finding
the cause when results are in error even though correct values have been entered.
There are five step execution modes: "continuous step," "1 step," "high-speed step,"
"back continuous step" and "back 1 step."
8-22
8-5 Executing Simulator
SIMULATOR
Execute the ladder program one step at a time. Execution of the ladder program
stops when single step execution is performed during scan operation.
1 step = instruction
Execution returns to
the top of the program
when execution Each press of executes
reaches ENDH. one instruction.
Execute the ladder program one step at a time by the following procedure.
8-23
8-5 Executing Simulator
Other procedure
• Click the button.
• Press the Shift + F8 keys.
8-24
8-5 Executing Simulator
[Tip]
• When split screen is selected, the currently executing rung is scrolled and
displayed matched to the continuous step execution speed only in the upper
screen.
Use the lower screen to check only movement of certain, specific sections of
the program.
"Cursor movement" page 8-30
• If the continuous step execution speed is too fast, making it difficult to check
the content of the ladder program, set a wait time to adjust execution speed.
"Setting the wait time" page 8-20
8
Executes the program
SIMULATOR
until the specified step.
0
Enter the No. of the step to
be executed.
8-25
8-5 Executing Simulator
Execution returns
to ENDH when
execution reaches Each press of executes
the top of the one instruction.
program.
8 Other procedure
• Click the button.
SIMULATOR
Execution returns
to ENDH when
execution reaches
the top of the Continuously executes a
program. single instruction.
8-26
8-5 Executing Simulator
SIMULATOR
Press the (Space) key.
[Tip]
• The cursor changes color to red when you
specify the cursor position on the currently
executing rung, or when program execution
has stopped at a breakpoint.
• Two or more breakpoints can be specified in a single ladder program.
8-27
8-5 Executing Simulator
[Tip]
Back step execution cannot be performed once execution is stopped. To perform
back step execution after execution has been stopped, perform step execution
again. Back step execution can be continued if execution has been paused.
Reset ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
Run (P) Reset (R) F10
8-28
8-6 Ladder Monitor
Outline
Ladder Monitor functions are as follows:
SIMULATOR
The Ladder Monitor window is automatically displayed when the Ladder Monitor is
started up from Unit Editor. So, the following procedure is normally not required.
Other procedure
Click the button.
[Tip]
• Only one closed Ladder Monitor window can be opened.
• A Ladder Monitor window cannot be selected when a Ladder Monitor window
is already opened.
8-29
8-6 Ladder Monitor
Cursor
Rung No.
Scroll bar
Step No.
Contact
• To view hidden parts of the display, use the scroll bar or the keys.
• When scan execution or step execution is performed, device values, ON/OFF
indications, and other state change successively matched to execution of the
ladder program.
• When step execution is performed, the screen is scrolled and displayed, and the
cursor on the currently executing rung moves matched to execution of the ladder
program. The mnemonic list window also appears to display the currently
indicating step.
Cursor movement
key: Moves the cursor.
PageDown PageUp key: Moves the cursor one page (screen) at a time.
+ key: Moves the cursor one block at a time.
8 Ctrl
[Tip]
Monitoring a ladder program outside of the screen display area
If you move the mouse cursor to between the window frame and the section at
the top right of the scroll bar, the mouse cursor will change to . Now, if you
move the mouse cursor downwards in this state with the right mouse button
pressed, the window will be split into two parts. Each of these parts can display
other locations within the ladder program. So, you can monitor two separate
parts within the same ladder program at the same time.
To switch the active parts of this split screen, either click the desired part with the
mouse, or press the Shift + F6 keys.
Important: • When the mouse cursor is displayed as , the window size merely
changes and cannot be set to a split screen.
• Only the upper screen is scrolled during step execution.
8-30
8-6 Ladder Monitor
[Tip]
"Scan" and "step execution" are displayed respectively for "continuous scan
execution" and "continuous step execution" in the Run mode.
There are five ways of changing the size at which ladder diagrams are viewed.
When Editor is first started up, the view size is 100%.
Change the view size by the following procedure.
8
SIMULATOR
"Changing the View Mode" page 8-32
Other procedure
Reducing the view size
Press the Ctrl + PageUp keys.
Enlarging the view size
Press the Ctrl + PageDown keys.
8-31
8-6 Ladder Monitor
8
SIMULATOR
Displays at twice (largest display size) the standard size. Select this setting
200%
when text is small and difficult to read.
150% Displays at 1.5 times the standard size.
120% Displays at 1.2 times the standard size.
View size
100% (std) Standard size
Smallest display size. Select this setting to check overall movement when
80% the number of cells that can be displayed in a single screen increases to the
maximum number.
XYM Displays the device name of the ladder diagram by XYM.
Signed decimal constant Displays decimal constants as signed constants in ladder diagrams.
Device label Displays the label name of each device in the ladder diagram.
Comment Displays comments in the ladder diagram.
Grid Displays the grid lines of cells in the edit screen.
Device for units Displays device names in the ladder program by device for unit annotation.
Comment 1 Displays comment 1. (Can be transferred to the PLC.)
Comment
Comment 2 Displays comment 2. (Cannot be transferred to the PLC.)
type
Comment 3 Displays comment 3. (Cannot be transferred to the PLC.)
Editing screen Reflects settings on edit screen of current window.
Mode Browse screen Reflects settings on verify screen of current window.
setup
range Both Reflects settings on both edit screen and verify screen of current window.
All windows Reflects settings on all windows.
* "Current window" refers to the currently selected active window.
8-32
8-6 Ladder Monitor
Display the device name of symbols on the Ladder Monitor expressed as devices
for units by the following procedure.
"Expressing devices for units" refers to expression of relays assigned in Unit Editor
as the "nth terminal of the nth connected unit."
For example, the 5th input relay No. at the input unit next to the CPU is expressed
as "0001-0005" and the 31st relay No. of the 3rd output unit from the CPU is
expressed as "03-00115".
SIMULATOR
The device name of symbols on the Ladder Monitor are expressed as devices for
units by the following procedure.
Other procedure
Press the Shift + (Space) keys.
8-33
8-6 Ladder Monitor
Displaying/Hiding Comments
View (V) Comment (C) Ctrl + (Space)
Toggle between display and hiding of device comments on the Ladder Monitor.
The display comment is "comment 1".
button
Other procedure
Displaying Labels
View (V) Label (L) Ctrl + Backspace
Display labels instead of device names for symbols on the Ladder Monitor.
Display labels by the following procedure.
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + Backspace keys.
8-34
8-6 Ladder Monitor
[Tip]
Labels can be used instead of device names when inputting symbols or
finding/replacing symbols. For example, devices names can be written as follows
when the label "SW1" is assigned to device 0000:
Toolbar
Dialog bar
8
SIMULATOR
Status bar
1 Select {View (V)} from Menu, and select the item to view.
Marked: Displayed
Unmarked: Hidden
8-35
8-6 Ladder Monitor
Displaying the Ladder Monitor window at the bottom of the screen ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
View (V) Ladder at bottom (K)
The Ladder Monitor window can be displayed at all times at the bottom of the
mnemonic list or other windows. If the Ladder Monitor window is set to be displayed
at the bottom at all times, you drag-and-drop devices to register them to each
Monitor even if the Registration Monitor or Batch Monitor windows are overlapping
the Ladder Monitor window.
Set the Ladder Monitor to be displayed at the bottom by the following procedure.
Other procedure
Click the button.
[Tip]
To undo this setting, follow the same procedure to unmark the item.
Selecting Devices
In the Ladder Monitor window, you can select devices and change their current
values and setting values.
8 There are two ways of selecting a device, by using the mouse or by using keys.
Note: When the cursor is displayed gray, key operations on the Ladder Monitor
window are not possible. To move the cursor by the arrow keys, or to turn
devices ON/OFF by the (Space) key, press the Esc key once to cancel
selection of the cursor and then operate the keys.
8-36
8-6 Ladder Monitor
1 Move the mouse cursor to the device to turn ON/OFF and click to select.
The contact changes color to indicate that the device ON/OFF state has
changed.
SIMULATOR
green state, and press the (Space) key.
The contact changes color to indicate that the device ON/OFF state has
changed.
Note: • When the cursor is displayed gray, key operations on the Ladder Monitor
window are not possible. To move the cursor by the arrow keys, or to turn
devices ON/OFF by the (Space) key, press the Esc key once to cancel
selection of the cursor and then operate the keys.
• Timer and counter contacts cannot be switched ON/OFF.
8-37
8-6 Ladder Monitor
[Tip]
The shortcut for changing the radix is Ctrl + E .
Each press of the Ctrl + E shortcut key combination toggles between decimal
(#) and hexadecimal ($).
8
2
SIMULATOR
Change the radix, current value and setting value in the dialog bar.
Current value write button Setting value write button
8-38
8-6 Ladder Monitor
Hex Hex
*3 When the bit is set to "32", "2" cannot be set.
Select current value of
*4 Values are expressed as signed binary (2's complement).
device/display method
Radix • When the bit is set to "1", the radix can not be changed to other
(Hex/Bin) of setting
value. than "2".
• Changes made to radix are reflected to the overall window
(Registration Monitor for each selected device).
• The current value is cleared when the radix is changed.
Comment
Select type of comment
to be displayed.
Comment 1/comment 2/comment 3/none 8
Wr current
Enter current value. Up to 17 digits (32 bits) can be entered.
SIMULATOR
value
Can be set only in case of timers and counters. Up to 17 digits (32
Value Enter setting value.
bits) can be entered.
[Tip]
• Of the number of bits and radix settings, the number of bits is given priority.
(For example, if the number of bits is changed to "1" with the number of bits set
to "16" and the radix set to "Decimal," the radix is changed to "Binary.")
• In the case of both 16-bit and 32-bit bit devices, only numbers whose
lowermost two digits are "00" can be registered.
• When Bit is set to "32", the lower 16 bits from an even-numbered device No.
becomes the upper 16 bits.
• The "Reset" button is displayed only when timers or counters are selected.
• Bit value devices are reset when PLC operation is executed even if the
ON/OFF state of bit devices or current values or setting values are changed
with PLC operation stopped. In this case, either pause operation and change
the device state, or change the device state while the program is running.
Canceling settings
1 Click the "Cancel" button on
the dialog bar.
8-39
8-6 Ladder Monitor
[Tip]
This item can be selected only when the Ladder Monitor is active.
1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Rung/step No. (L)} from Menu.
The Jump to Specified Rung dialog box is displayed.
8
SIMULATOR
[Tip]
• To cancel a jump, click the "Jump" button.
• The final rung or step is displayed if you specify a No. greater than the final
rung No. or step No.
8-40
8-6 Ladder Monitor
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + Home keys.
SIMULATOR
The cursor jumps to the bottom of the ladder diagram.
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + End keys.
8-41
8-6 Ladder Monitor
1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Previous block (P)} from Menu.
8 Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + keys.
SIMULATOR
Note: You cannot jump to the previous circuit block from the comment rung.
1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Next block (P)} from Menu.
Other procedure
Press the Ctrl + keys.
Note: You cannot jump to the next circuit block from the comment rung.
8-42
8-6 Ladder Monitor
Jump to the symbol following or preceding the symbol where the cursor is currently
located by the following procedure.
1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Previous symbol (W)} from Menu.
Other procedure 8
Press the Shift + Tab keys.
SIMULATOR
Note: You cannot jump to the previous symbol from the comment rung.
1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Next symbol (F)} from Menu.
Other procedure
Press the Tab key.
Note: You cannot jump to the next symbol from the comment rung.
8-43
8-6 Ladder Monitor
Jump to the start or end of rungs where the cursor is located by the following
procedure.
1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {Top of rung (H)} from Menu.
8
Other procedure
SIMULATOR
1 Select {Find (E)} {Jump (J)} {End of rung (E)} from Menu.
Other procedure
Press the End key.
8-44
8-6 Ladder Monitor
Other procedure
• Press the Ctrl + F keys.
• Click the button.
SIMULATOR
[Tip]
The regular display/reduced display setting for the Find dialog box is saved to KV
BUILDER. For this reason, the setting is enabled when KV BUILDER is next
started up.
[Tip]
To search timer, counter, or high-speed counter instructions, enter the TMR or C
instructions. To search operands, enter T0 or C0.
8-45
8-6 Ladder Monitor
The cell No. is assigned a number 0, 1, 2, 3 and so forth to 9 from the left edge.
• Rung comments, top rung comment
8-46
8-6 Ladder Monitor
1 Select {Run (P)} {Clear all devices (L)} from Menu, and select the
devices to be cleared.
The confirmation device dialog box is displayed.
SIMULATOR
2 Click the "Yes" button.
This clears all devices.
Clicking "No" cancels clearing of all devices.
[Tip]
If you execute clear all devices, the "Cannot execute unless switch to STOP.
Switch to STOP?" message is displayed when the operation mode is the Run
mode.
To set to the Stop mode before executing clear all devices, click the "Yes" button.
To cancel clearing all devices, click the "No" button.
8-47
8-7 Batch Monitor
[Tip]
A new window is opened each time that this operation is executed.
[Tip]
If the Batch Monitor window is opened when a device has not been selected by
the cursor, the window is opened for the device displayed in the dialog bar.
8-48
8-7 Batch Monitor
Registering Devices
Display devices can be changed if a device is registered on an already displayed
Batch Monitor. There are two ways of registering devices:
• By dragging the device from the Ladder Monitor window
• By specifying the device in the dialog bar
1 Select the device to display in the Ladder Monitor window and keep the
mouse down in a clicked state.
The mouse cursor shape changes as shown below.
SIMULATOR
2 Drag the mouse cursor onto the Batch Monitor window.
Drag
8-49
8-7 Batch Monitor
• Device type
• Device No.
• Number of bits
• Radix
• Comment display mode
• Current value
• Setting value (possible only on timers and counters)
8
SIMULATOR
[Tip]
• The Tab key moves the cursor in the forward direction, while the Tab + Shift
keys move the cursor in the backward direction.
• The key functions as follows:
When the cursor is at Type or No.: New values are registered.
When the cursor is at bit, radix or comment: Values are written to the current
device.
• When the type is selected by "R" (relay) or "DM" (data memory) when the KV-
700 is used, and the No. button is clicked, a list of relays and data
memories currently assigned to each unit is displayed. Select the desired relay
or data memory from the list to monitor relays or data memory for each unit.
Canceling settings
8-50
8-7 Batch Monitor
• To view hidden parts of the display, use the scroll bar or the PageUp or PageDown
keys.
• You can move the cursor using the keys.
• The current values change in keeping with Monitor execution.
SIMULATOR
D16 16 10 Unsigned H: Hex
D32 32 10 Unsigned A: ASCII
S16 16 10 Signed F: Floating point type real
number
S32 32 10 Signed
H16 16 16 Signed
H32 32 16 Signed
A16 16 ASCII ―
A32 32 ASCII ―
F16 16 FLOAT ―
F32 32 FLOAT ―
8-51
8-7 Batch Monitor
1 Click the Batch Monitor window to save to make it the current window.
8
3 Specify the folder (directory) to save the window to and the file name.
SIMULATOR
Specify the folder (directory) to which the Batch Monitor window is to be saved. Normally,
Save in (I)
the project folder to which the currently simulator ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the monitor window to be saved.
Save as type (T) Specify "Batch monitor (*.kal)".
[Tip]
The file is automatically appended with the extender ".kal" when the file name is
set even if it is not specified when the file name is entered.
8-52
8-7 Batch Monitor
3 Specify the folder (directory) to read the file from and the file name.
SIMULATOR
Specify the file name. Make sure that the file
type is "Batch
Monitor(*.kal)."
Specify the folder (directory) to which the Batch Monitor window is saved. Normally, the
Look in (I)
project folder to which the currently simulator ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the monitor window to be read.
Files of type (T) Specify "Batch Monitor (*.kal)".
8-53
8-7 Batch Monitor
Selecting devices
Select devices by the following procedure.
8
Using keys to select devices
SIMULATOR
1 Move the cursor to the device to select using the keys with the
cursor the same color as the title bar, and press the key.
The cursor turns gray to indicate that the device is selected
8-54
8-7 Batch Monitor
1 Move the cursor to the device whose state is to be turned ON/OFF, and
double-click the device.
This switches the ON/OFF display of the device.
ON state OFF state
Double-click
1 Move the cursor to the device whose is to be turned ON/OFF using the
keys with the cursor the same color as the title bar, and press the
space bar.
8
This switches the ON/OFF display of the device.
SIMULATOR
ON state OFF state
(Space) key
Other procedure
Move the cursor to the device whose is to be turned ON/OFF using the
keys with the cursor the same color as the title bar, and press the space bar.
8-55
8-7 Batch Monitor
• Device type
• Device No.
• Number of bits
• Radix
• Comment display mode
• Current value
• Setting value (possible only on timers and counters)
• Resetting of timer/counter current value
1 Make the Monitor window in which to change device settings the current
window.
8
2 Move the cursor to the device to be changed and click the device.
SIMULATOR
3 Change the radix, comment, current value and setting value on the dialog
bar.
Current value write button
Radix Comment Setting value write button
[Tip]
• The Tab key moves the cursor in the forward direction, while the Tab + Shift
keys move the cursor in the backward direction.
• The key functions as follows:
When the cursor is at Type or No.: New values are registered.
When the cursor is at bit, radix or comment: Values are written to the current
device.
8-56
8-7 Batch Monitor
Hex Hex
*3 When the bit is set to "32", "2" cannot be set.
Select current value of
*4 Values are expressed as signed binary (2's complement).
device/display method
Rad • When the bit is set to "1", the radix can not be changed to other
(Hex/Bin) of setting
value. than "2".
• Changes made to radix are reflected to the overall window
(Registration Monitor for each selected device).
• The current value is cleared when the radix is changed.
Comment
Select type of comment
to be displayed.
Comment 1/comment 2/comment 3/none 8
Wr current
Enter current value. Up to 17 digits (32 bits) can be entered.
SIMULATOR
value
Can be set only in case of timers and counters. Up to 17 digits (32
Set value Enter setting value.
bits) can be entered.
[Tip]
• Of the number of bits and radix settings, the number of bits is given priority.
(For example, if the number of bits is changed to "1" with the number of bits set
to "16" and the radix set to "Decimal," the radix is changed to "Binary.")
• In the case of both 16-bit and 32-bit bit devices, only numbers whose
lowermost two digits are "00" can be registered.
• When Bit is set to "32", the lower 16 bits from an even-numbered device No.
becomes the upper 16 bits.
• The "Reset" button is displayed only when timers or counters are selected.
• Bit value devices are reset when PLC operation is executed even if the
ON/OFF state of bit devices or current values or setting values are changed
with PLC operation stopped. In this case, either pause operation and change
the device state, or change the device state while the program is running.
Canceling settings
8-57
8-7 Batch Monitor
Resetting Devices
Settings (R) Reset (R)
Reset the selected device and return its settings to their defaults by the following
procedure.
[Tip]
By resetting devices, only the device on the rung where the cursor is located is
reset. To reset all devices, select {Run (P)} {Reset (R)} from Menu.
"Reset" page 8-28
8
SIMULATOR
Other procedure
Select {Settings (R)} {Reset devices in monitors
(R)} from Menu.
8-58
8-8 Registration Monitor
SIMULATOR
Display a new Registration Monitor window by the following procedure.
Other procedure
Click the button.
[Tip]
A new window is opened each time that this operation is executed.
8-59
8-8 Registration Monitor
Registering Devices
To simulate devices by Registration Monitor, devices must first be registered. There
are two ways of registering devices:
Other procedure
Click the button.
[Tip]
A new window is opened each time that this operation is executed.
[Tip]
Initially, the time chart is displayed. To display comments, select the type of
comment by [Comment] on the dialog bar.
8-60
8-8 Registration Monitor
• Device type
• Device No.
• Number of bits
• Radix
• Comment display mode
• Current value
• Setting value (possible only on timers and counters)
8
[Tip]
SIMULATOR
• The Tab key moves the cursor in the forward direction, while the Tab + Shift
keys move the cursor in the backward direction.
• The key functions as follows:
When the cursor is at Type or No.: New values are registered.
When the cursor is at bit, radix or comment: Values are written to the current
device.
Canceling settings
8-61
8-8 Registration Monitor
Time chart
• If many devices have been registered, you can display them more easily by
opening multiple windows.
• The vertical cursor on the time chart can be moved by the keys.
• When Simulator is executed, current values and the time chart change
successively matched to the Simulator execution speed.
8
[Tip]
SIMULATOR
8-62
8-8 Registration Monitor
8
3
SIMULATOR
Specify the folder (directory) to save the window to and the file name.
Specify "Registration
Specify the file name.
Monitor(*.kre)" as the
file type.
Specify the folder (directory) to which the Registration Monitor window is to be saved.
Save in (I)
Normally, the project folder to which the currently simulator ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the monitor window to be saved.
Save as type (T) Specify "Registration Monitor (*.kre)".
[Tip]
The file is automatically appended with the extender ".kre" when the file name is
set even if it is not specified when the file name is entered.
8-63
8-8 Registration Monitor
2 Select "Registration Monitor (*.kre)" from the Files of type pulldown list.
[Tip]
The default is "Registration Monitor".
3 Specify the folder (directory) to read the file from and the file name.
8
SIMULATOR
Specify the folder (directory) to which the Registration Monitor window is to be saved.
Look in (I)
Normally, the project folder to which the currently simulator ladder is to be saved opens.
File name (N) Enter the name of the monitor window to be read.
Files of type (T) Specify "Registration Monitor (*.kre)".
8-64
8-8 Registration Monitor
Selecting devices
Select devices by the following procedure.
SIMULATOR
device to select using
the keys with
the cursor the same
color as the title bar,
and press the key.
The cursor turns gray to
indicate that the device is selected
Double-click
8-65
8-8 Registration Monitor
(Space) key
window in which to
change device settings
the current window.
2 Move the cursor to the device to be changed and click the device.
3 Change the radix, comment, current value and setting value on the dialog bar.
Current value write button
Radix Comment Setting value write button
[Tip]
• The Tab key moves the cursor in the forward direction, while the Tab + Shift
keys move the cursor in the backward direction.
• The key functions as follows:
When the cursor is at Type or No.: New values are registered.
When the cursor is at bit, radix or comment: Values are written to the current
device.
8-66
8-8 Registration Monitor
Settable Values
Item Description
Ladder Monitor Batch Monitor/Registration Monitor
Relay, control relay, timer, counter,
comparator, high-speed counter,
Type Select the type of device.
data memory, control memory,
temporary data memory, trimmer No.
No. Enter the device No. Settable Nos. vary according to device.
1*1, 16, 32*2
*1 Devices other than relay cannot be set
to "1".
Bit Select bit length of data. *2 When KV-10/16/24/40 is used,
timers/counters cannot be set to "32".
When KV-700 is used, timer/counter
and digital trimmer values are fixed to
"32".
Attribute
SIMULATOR
Comment Comment 1/comment 2/comment 3/none
be displayed.
Wr current
Enter current value. Up to 17 digits (32 bits) can be entered.
value
Can be set only in case of timers and counters. Up to 17 digits (32
Set value Enter setting value.
bits) can be entered.
[Tip]
• Of the number of bits and radix settings, the number of bits is given priority.
(For example, if the number of bits is changed to "1" with the number of bits set
to "16" and the radix set to "Decimal," the radix is changed to "Binary.")
• In the case of both 16-bit and 32-bit bit devices, only numbers whose
lowermost two digits are "00" can be registered.
• When Bit is set to "32", the 16 bits lower than an even-numbered device No.
becomes the upper 16 bits.
• The "Reset" button is displayed only when timers or counters are selected.
• Bit value devices are reset when PLC operation is executed even if the
ON/OFF state of bit devices or current values or setting values are changed
with PLC operation stopped. If this happens, change the state of the devices
during program operation.
• Timer and counter setting values cannot be changed when the program is
write-protected.
Canceling settings
1 Click the "Cancel" button on the dialog bar.
8-67
8-8 Registration Monitor
Only the attributes (number of bits, radix and comments) of other devices can be
copied.
This feature is used to change only attributes to the same as those for other already
existing devices with the device type and Nos. as they are.
Copy device attributes by the following procedure.
Other procedure
To copy from the keyboard, select the copy source device, and press the Esc
key.
8
2 Click the copy destination device with the right mouse
SIMULATOR
button.
The menu is displayed.
Other procedure
To copy from the keyboard, move the cursor to the copy
destination device.
Note: Do not use the left mouse button to specify the copy destination. Clicking
the left mouse button specifies the copy source.
Other procedure
Select {Monitor (M)}
{Registration monitor (M)}
{Copy device attributes
(C)}.
8-68
8-8 Registration Monitor
Moving devices
Ctrl +
Ctrl +
The device at the currently selected cursor position can be moved to another
position by dragging-and-dropping to change the order of devices.
Move devices by the following procedure.
2 Move (drag) the mouse cursor to the device below the position where
you want to move it to with the mouse held down.
SIMULATOR
3 Release the left mouse button (drop).
The selected device is inserted at the mouse cursor position.
Other procedure
Moving devices up
Press the Ctrl + keys.
Moving devices down
Press the Ctrl + keys.
8-69
8-8 Registration Monitor
Deleting devices
Monitor (M) Registration monitor (M) Delete device (D)
Delete the device at the currently selected cursor position by the following
procedure.
8
3 Select "Delete" from Menu.
SIMULATOR
This deletes the selected device. The selection cursor moves to the device
under the deleted device.
Other procedure
Select {Monitor (M)} {Registration monitor (M)} {Delete device (D)} from
Menu.
8-70
8-8 Registration Monitor
Sorting devices
Monitor (M) Registration monitor (M) Sort devices (S)
SIMULATOR
The menu is displayed.
Other procedure
Select {Monitor (M)} {Registration monitor (M)} {Sort devices (S)} from
Menu.
8-71
8-8 Registration Monitor
Resetting devices
Settings (R) Reset devices in monitors (R)
Set selected devices to return them to their defaults by the following procedure.
[Tip]
By resetting a device, only the devices on the rung containing the cursor are
reset. To reset all devices, select {Run (E)} {Reset (R)} from Menu.
"Reset" page 8-28
8
2 Click the right mouse button.
SIMULATOR
Other procedure
Select {Settings (R)} {Reset devices in monitors (R)} from Menu.
8-72
8-8 Registration Monitor
SIMULATOR
Time chart is displayed as " " when ON and as " " Time chart is displayed as " " to indicate that the
when OFF to indicate that the value has not changed. value has changed.
Time chart is displayed as " " to indicate that the Time chart is displayed as " " to indicate that the
value has not changed. value has changed.
The time axis on the time chart advances from right to left. In other words, newer
values are displayed as you advance to the right. The cursor on the time chart
expresses the section indicated as the "current value," and you can change the
position of the current value by moving the cursor.
The details indicated by the time chart gradation differ as follows during scan
execution and step execution:
8-73
8-8 Registration Monitor
The time chart changes color when the execution mode is changed:
• The active state of the vertical cursor is switched by the Tab key.
• The value at the position where an active vertical cursor is located is displayed
as the current value. Even if a reset is performed, the value at the position
where the vertical cursor is located is displayed as the current value. When
there is no vertical cursor, the true current value is displayed. Changes to the
current value can be entered when there is no vertical cursor.
The vertical cursor disappears by clicking a device whose values are to be
changed. In the Registration Monitor, the vertical cursor can be manipulated
only when the monitor has stopped.
• The vertical cursor disappears when device contact ON/OFF states, or current
values and setting values are changed.
8-74
8-8 Registration Monitor
SIMULATOR
Other procedure
Click the button.
3 Set the number of gradations within the range 1 to 511. (Default is 32.)
The number of gradations on the time chart changes to the newly set number.
[Tip]
If there are too many gradations and they do not fit
inside the window, the message "Please enter an
integer between 1 to 511" will be displayed. If this
happens, either widen the window, or reduce the
number of gradations.
8-75
8-8 Registration Monitor
Important: Check the following before you start to print the content of
Registration Monitor.
• Make sure that the printer is connected correctly.
→ Check the connection between the PC and the printer by
referring to the User's Manuals.
• Select {File (F)} {Printer setup (R)} from
Menu, and make sure that the printer is set
correctly.
→ If the printer is not set correctly, correct
the settings to match the printer
connected to the PC.
Preview
File (F) Print preview (V)
8 Check the contents to be printed in the preview screen by the following procedure.
1
SIMULATOR
8-76
8-8 Registration Monitor
Executing printing
File (F) Print (P)
Execute printing by the following procedure.
SIMULATOR
[Tip]
If the Registration Monitor window is not printed properly, check the printer
settings and the printer connection.
8-77
Chapter 9
KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR
This chapter describes how to display the two panels "data access panel" and
"message panel" on the KV-P series, and the operation of the switches in
these panels.
Other procedure
• Press the F12 key.
• Click the button.
9-2
9-1 Starting Up and Exiting Panel Editor
9-3
9-2 Panel Editor
The following describes the functions of each of the areas on Panel Editor.
Item Function
9 (1) Menu buttons Set the display details of each panel or change the settings using
the buttons at the top of the Panel Editor.
KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR
9-4
9-2 Panel Editor
Menu Buttons
Ladder Edit view
This button allows you to resize the panel so that you can edit the ladder program
while referencing details in panel editing.
Clicking "Ladder Edit view" button moves the Panel Editor to the right
side of the screen. The left and right areas are now displayed at the top
and bottom, respectively.
These areas display both the settings of the data access panel and
message panel, and are handy when editing ladders.
Regular display Ladder edit view
9-5
9-2 Panel Editor
Print/print preview
This button displays the Print/Print Preview dialog box.
This section describes the settings in the KV-P16 Print Setup dialog box.
For details on how to execute printing, see "6-17 Printing Ladder Programs " (page
6-153).
[Tip]
All page settings are set to be printed as the default setting.
9-6
9-2 Panel Editor
Option
This button sets the display details of the panel edit area.
Mark the checkboxes of the items to display, and click the "OK" button.
For details of display items on the data access panel, see "9-4 Setting the Data
Access Panel" (page 9-12).
For details of display items on the message panel, see "9-5 Setting the Message
Panel" (page 9-14).
"Cancel" button
Disables the details set on Panel Editor, and returns to KV BUILDER.
"Help" button
Displays the Panel Editor online help.
If you use Help, you can enter an item (keyword) that you are not sure about to
search for an explanation.
9-7
9-3 System Parameters
(3) Switch/buzzer
configuration
9 Item Function
(1) Data access Sets the following details:
panel system • Page callup devices on the data access panel
KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR
parameters • Data memory (DM) for storing the currently displayed page No.
• Data memory (DM) for storing reset operations
• Data memory (DM) for storing the time that the backlight is
turned OFF
"Data access panel system parameters" page 9-9
(2) Message panel Sets the following details:
system • Page callup devices on the data access panel
parameters • Data memory (DM) for storing the currently displayed page No.
"Message panel system parameters" page 9-10
(3) Switch/buzzer Sets the following details:
configuration • Relays to be assigned to switches
• Relays for turning on buzzers (sound emitted when switch is
pressed)
"Switch/buzzer configuration" page 9-11
(4) "Auto" button When the "Auto" button is clicked, the leading device is
automatically set.
(5) "OK" button Enables (applies) the details set in the System Parameters dialog
box, and returns to the Panel Editor.
(6) "Cancel" button Disable the details set in the System Parameters dialog box, and
returns to the Panel Editor.
9-8
9-3 System Parameters
Item Function
(1) Page call dev: Sets the page callup device on the data access panel.
leading relay/DM When a relay is set (128 relays are occupied leading from the
relay No. that is set)
• The relay that is set is assigned to page No.1, and continuous
relays are automatically assigned to subsequent pages.
When a data memory (DM) is set (one DM is occupied)
• The data memory (DM) that is set becomes the storage
destination of the "page No. to be displayed in the panel."
(2) On display page The data memory (DM) that is set becomes the storage destination
No. DM of the "page No. currently displayed in the data access panel."
• When page No.0 to page No.127 is displayed on the panel, the
value of the "On display page No. DM" becomes 0 to 127 (that
is, the page No. is stored as it is).
• When page No.128 is displayed on the panel, a value obtained
by adding 1000 to the page No. of the currently stored message
panel is stored to "message display page save DM". For
example, if the value of the On display page No. DM is "1016",
9
this means that "page No.16" on the message panel is currently
9-9
9-3 System Parameters
Item Function
(1) Page call dev: Sets the page callup device on the message panel.
leading relay/DM When a relay is set (128 relays are occupied leading from the
relay No. that is set)
• The relay that is set is assigned to page No.1, and continuous
relays are automatically assigned to subsequent pages.
When a data memory (DM) is set (one DM is occupied)
• The data memory (DM) that is set becomes the storage
destination of the "page No. to be displayed in the panel."
(2) On display page The data memory (DM) that is set becomes the storage destination
No. DM of the "page No. currently displayed in the message panel."
• When page No.0 to page No.127 is displayed on the panel, the
value of the "On display page No. DM" becomes 0 to 127 (that
is, the page No. is stored as it is).
• When page No.128 is displayed on the panel, a value obtained
by adding 1000 to the page No. of the currently stored data
access panel is stored to "data display page save DM". For
example, if the value of the On display page No. DM is "1016",
this means that "page No.16" on the message panel is currently
displayed on the message panel.
9
KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR
9-10
9-3 System Parameters
Switch/buzzer configuration
Item Function
(1) Switch leading When the leading switch assignment relay No. is set, continuous
relay relays are as set as follows to switches or functions. (11 relays are
occupied leading from the relay No. that is set)
Example) When internal relay 04600 is set as the leading switch
assignment relay No.
Relay No. Switch/Function
04600 Switch
04601 Switch
04602 Switch
04603 Switch
04604 Switch
04605 Switch
04606 Switch
04607 Switch
04608 Switch
04609 Switch
9
04610 Buzzer setting
9-11
9-4 Setting the Data Access Panel
Item Function
(1) Data access This area displays the basic settings of the data access panel.
9 panel system Setting values displayed on a white background can be changed in
parameters this screen. Setting values displayed on a gray background are
display area automatically assigned. To change the settings, refer to "System
KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR
9-12
9-4 Setting the Data Access Panel
Item Function
Page No. Multiple sets of details to be displayed on the data access panel
are available and are managed by page No. Page No.1 to No.128
can be used.
Page call device Displays "relays" or "data memories (DM)" for calling up each
page.
Display device The current value and setting value of the device set here are
displayed on the second line of the data access panel.
Data plate Enter the text to be displayed on the data access panel.
Font color Select one of "green," "red" or "orange" as the text of the font color
to be displayed.
Disp mode Select the background of the text to be displayed.
Scroll speed Select one of "OFF," "standard" or "fast" as the scroll speed.
Blink Set whether or not to display text blinking.
NEXT group Select one of "standard", "pro" or "free" as the page group.
Data length Set whether to handle the length of display data as 1 word or 2
words.
Data format Select either of "unsigned," "signed" or "Hex" as the format of
display data.
Decimal Set the number of digits past the decimal point when displaying
data.
Change data Set whether or not data displayed on the data access panel can be
changed by the data access keys.
9
Display setting value Select whether or not to display setting values when the display
9-13
9-5 Setting the Message Panel
Item Function
(1) Message panel This area displays the basic settings of the message panel. Setting
9 system values displayed on a white background can be changed in this
parameters screen. Setting values displayed on a gray background are
display area automatically assigned. To change the settings, refer to "System
KV-P SERIES PANEL EDITOR
9-14
9-5 Setting the Message Panel
Item Function
Page No. Multiple sets of details to be displayed on the message panel are
available and are managed by page No. Page No.1 to No.128 can
be used.
Page call device Displays "relays" or "data memories (DM)" for calling up each
page.
Priority display page Select "Priority" to display this page preferentially without waiting
for display of other pages when this page is displayed.
Font size Select from "X1", "X2" or "X4" as the size of characters in display
messages.
Message Enter the text to be displayed on the message panel.
Font color Select one of "green," "red" or "orange" as the text of the font color
to be displayed.
Disp mode Select the background of the text to be displayed.
Scroll speed Select one of "OFF," "standard" or "fast" as the scroll speed.
Blink Set whether or not to display text blinking.
Function switch Enter the plate of each of the , or function
plate switches.
NEXT group Select one of "standard", "pro" or "free" as the page group.
Data length Set whether to handle the length of display data as 1 word or 2
words.
Data format Select either of "unsigned," "signed" or "Hex" as the format of
display data.
9
Decimal Set the number of digits past the decimal point when displaying
9-15
Appendices
Refer to error message tables if trouble occurs during operation or if you want
to find out how to remedy errors that occur during programming.
Refer to lists of instructions, device Nos., sample programs and the table of
circuits registered to the circuit library as required during programming. A list
of shortcut key commands is also provided as a quick reference.
10 Index.................................................................................. A-83
1 Error Messages
1 Error Messages
This appendix describes error messages that are displayed during operation and
how to remedy error messages that are displayed.
System Errors
These error messages are displayed when the overall system (including Windows)
becomes unstable.
A-2
1 Error Messages
Memory Errors
This error messages are displayed when Windows runs out of memory.
If any of the following message is displayed, either exit other applications that
are running, or increase memory.
File Errors
These error messages are displayed when a file is damaged.
APPENDICES
Could not open text file.
A-3
1 Error Messages
Installer Errors
These error messages are displayed if the file is not found at the appropriate place.
Something has probably caused the file in the folder (directory) at the installation
destination to be deleted.
Cannot insert any more as there are The program cannot be edited as it is too Limit the number of rungs in the
too many lines large. ladder program to 29998.
Number of illegal instructions or The number of entered operands is Check the format of the instruction
operands either too many or too few for that according to the manual or Help.
instruction.
Operand x : Unavailable device An unavailable device has been
specified.
Instruction does not exist Wrong instruction mnemonic Check the instruction specifications
Illegal No.1 operand The range of operands is outside the according to the manual or Help.
Illegal No.2 operand settable range.
A-4
1 Error Messages
APPENDICES
A-5
1 Error Messages
Undefined sub-routine The program has ended with a called Program the sub-routine program
sub-routine still undefined. between the END and ENDH
instructions.
Sub-routine No. is duplicated. Two or more sub-routines of the same Sub-routines of the same No. cannot
No. are defined. be defined in duplicate. Change the
program so that only one sub-routine
of the same No. is defined.
Pair instruction nesting overflow The number of nested instructions Change the program so that the
programmed in the program exceeds the number of nested instructions
nesting limit. programmed in the program is within
the nesting limit.
Illegal pair instruction response Instructions that must be used in pairs Change the program that these
are not programmed as a pair. instructions are programmed in pairs.
STG instruction is connected in The program contains a block OR- Do not OR-connect (serially) to the
parallel. connected (serially) to the STG STG instruction.
instruction.
No END instruction The END instruction cannot be found in Program the END instruction in the
the program up to the ENDH instruction. program before the ENDH instruction.
No ENDH instruction The ENDH instruction is not Program the ENDH instruction at the
programmed at the final rung of the final rung of the program.
program.
STG instruction position error The STG instruction is not programmed Program the STG instruction at the
at the start of the block. start of the block.
SFT instruction operand error The range of SFT instruction operands is Change the operands to within the
outside the settable range. settable range.
A-6
1 Error Messages
APPENDICES
Output elements cannot be
connected in parallel.
Input element for connecting to
output line
Output element for connecting to bus
line
Terminal element not for connection
to output line
Parallel connection block too long The block cannot be converted to a Change the circuit to reduce the
ladder program as the serial connection number of instructions in the serial
block contains too many instructions. connection block.
Maximum block line is exceeded. The ladder diagram contains a block Change the program so that blocks
comprising over 100 rungs. comprise less than 100 rungs.
No connection Instruction symbols are not located on Program instruction symbols on the
the path between bus lines. path between bus lines.
Illegal short-circuit Two points that must not be short- Do not short these points.
circuited are shorted.
Illegal parallel connection The serial connection between blocks is Change the circuit to ensure a correct
incorrect. serial connection.
Illegal connection Instruction symbols are connected in the Change the circuit to correct the
wrong way. connection.
A-7
1 Error Messages
A-8
1 Error Messages
APPENDICES
used by other applications.
Modem is not connected, or not ON. The modem did not return the response. Check the modem connection and
power supply.
Connection target busy The connected device is busy. Wait a while before retrying the
connection.
NO CARRIER Communications between the modem Check the connections.
NO DIAL and connected devices is not successful.
A-9
1 Error Messages
A-10
1 Error Messages
APPENDICES
its service life.
RAM error Hardware malfunction
Change extended memory error Extended memory has been removed or Perform an all clear.
inserted.
Backup battery voltage drop error The backup battery voltage has Replace the backup battery.
dropped.
Memory error RAM content is corrupted as backup Replace the backup battery, and
battery voltage has dropped. perform an all clear.
Calendar timer error The clock value might be corrupted as Replace the backup battery, check the
backup battery voltage has dropped. clock value, and reset the clock as
necessary.
NMI error Hardware malfunction Contact your agent.
Memory Card error The Memory Card might be corrupted. Execute SCANDISK. Use a new
Operation may have stopped due to Memory Card. Remove any sources
magnetism or noise. of magnetism or noise.
Watchdog timer error Hardware error Turn the KV OFF. If this does not
Stack overflow remedy the problem, a probable
cause might be a malfunction.
Contact your agent.
A-11
1 Error Messages
Resource error
Error buffer overflow The number of system internal errors Clear the error, and turn the power on.
exceeds 16. If this error occurs frequently, contact
your agent.
Error buffer error An error occurred in the system internal Clear the error, and turn the power on.
buffer error. If this error occurs frequently, contact
your agent.
Auto read error Automatic reading failed. Operation may Remove any sources of magnetism or
have stopped due to magnetism or noise.
noise.
Write-protect might be enabled. Disable the memory switch.
File contents might have a problem. Store the program and data file in a
format matched to the environment.
No message error System protection error occurred. If this error occurs frequently, contact
your agent.
Unit type error The type of actually connected units Turn the KV OFF, and connect the
differs from the number of extended/special units set on Unit
special/extended units set in Unit Editor. Editor.
PLC initial state The PLC is initialized.
Cycle time error The scan time is 300 ms or faster. Review the program.
Make sure that there are not too many
repeated operations by the FOR to
NEXT instructions.
Check to see if the interrupt program
is not being executed at a fast scan
speed.
No program error The program is not registered. Register the program and then
continue operation.
CALL nest error The number of nested sub-routines This error occurs during ladder
exceeds the nesting level of four. execution. Review the ladder paying
FOR next error The number of nested FOR to NEXT attention to how sub-routines are used
APPENDICES
instructions exceeds the nesting level of and how the INT instruction is used.
eight.
INT nest error Five or more interrupts occurred This error occurs during ladder
simultaneously. execution. Review the ladder paying
attention to how the INT instruction is
used.
MPS nest error The number of nested MPS to MPP This error occurs during ladder
instructions exceeds the nesting level of execution. Review the ladder paying
eight. attention to how sub-routines are used
and how the INT instruction is used.
BREAK error The number of BREAK instructions This error occurs during conversion.
between FOR and NEXT exceeds eight. Limit the number of BREAK instruction
(When the BREAK instruction is nested, between FOR and NEXT to eight.
the total number of nested instructions
exceeds eight.)
Convert error Conversion (ladder conversion) failed. Correct the ladder.
A-12
1 Error Messages
Operation messages
These messages are displayed when an error occurs during setting up of units.
APPENDICES
Cannot open unit setup file. Check The file specified in the previous Import Enter the name of the new file.
file name. dialog box is deleted.
Cannot open unit setup file. Verify The unit setup information file could not Check the detailed message in the
detailed message? be opened. message display area, and remove
the cause of the error.
Cannot enter as slave is registered. An attempt was made to directly enter Delete all slave device setups before
Either delete slave, or change slave the addresses without the slave device directly entering the addresses.
setup. setup deleted.
The start relay/DM No. of the An attempt was made to manually enter Determine the relay/DM Nos. of the
master must be entered to enter the the address of the slave device before master before manually entering the
address of the slave. determining the relay/DM Nos. of the address of the slave device.
master.
Cannot save this unit setup The unit setup information file is too The unit configuration must be
information as setup information of large. reduced. This problem can be solved
unit is too large. Reduce number of by adding on memory.
units and try again.
A-13
1 Error Messages
A-14
1 Error Messages
Error message
As this printer does not support clipping. Might not print out correctly.
As this printer cannot plot rectangles. Cannot print correctly.
As this printer cannot plot lines. Cannot print correctly.
APPENDICES
A-15
2 List of Instructions
2 List of Instructions
This appendix lists instructions and a description what they do. For details, refer to
the KV-700 Series Instruction Reference Manual, or KV Series User's Manual, or
Help.
Basic Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Contact instructions
Contacts
Connects a device to the left bus line as an NO
LDP ○
contact that turns ON for one scan at its up edge.
APPENDICES
A-16
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Bit contact instructions
Connects a device to the left bus line as a contact that
BLD ○
relays the ON/OFF states of specified bits on the device.
APPENDICES
established.
.D/.L Turns OFF when condition [ S1 +1y S1 ]≤[ S2 +1y S2 ] is
Compare established.
contacts Turns ON when condition S1 ≠ S2 is established.
.U/.S
Turns OFF when condition S1 = S2 is established.
<> Turns ON when condition [ S1 +1y S1 ]≠[ S2 +1y S2 ] is ○
established.
.D/.L Turns OFF when condition [ S1 +1y S1 ]=[ S2 +1y S2 ] is
established.
Turns ON when condition S1 ≤ S2 is established.
.U/.S
Turns OFF when condition S1 > S2 is established.
<= Turns ON when condition [ S1 +1y S1 ]≤[ S2 +1y S2 ] is ○
established.
.D/.L Turns OFF when condition [ S1 +1y S1 ]>[ S2 +1y S2 ] is
established.
Turns ON when condition S1 ≥ S2 is established.
.U/.S
Turns OFF when condition S1 < S2 is established.
>= Turns ON when condition [ S1 +1y S1 ]≥[ S2 +1y S2 ] is ○
established.
.D/.L Turns OFF when condition [ S1 +1y S1 ]<[ S2 +1y S2 ] is
established.
A-17
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Output instructions
A-18
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Bit output instructions
Timer/counter instructions
Operation unit 100 ms 32-bit countdown ON delay
TMR ○ ○
timer
Operation unit 10 ms 32-bit countdown ON delay
Timers TMH ○ ○
timer
Operation unit 1 ms 32-bit countdown ON delay
TMS ○ ○
timer
.U ○
Interval Sets the mode, and measures the pulse interval
ITVL ○
timer and DM average values.
.S
APPENDICES
specified by S by 1 at the up edge of down
Up-down input.
UDC ○ ○
counter
Counter UDC n turns ON at 1-digit
incrementing/decrementing of the current value.
The current value is reset to 0 when reset input
turns ON.
Operation unit 10 ms up/down timer.
The current value of the timer specified by n is
incremented by 1 every 10 ms when up input is
ON.
Up-down
UDT The current value of the timer specified by n is ○
timer
decremented by 1 every 10 ms when up input is
ON.
The current value is held when up and down
inputs both turn ON or OFF.
A-19
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Connection/end instructions
Connect
A-20
2 List of Instructions
Applied Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Shift instruction
The ON/OFF state of data inputs is loaded at the
up edge of clock input.
That state is shifted from D1 to the relay
Shift SFT specified by D2 in sync with the clock pulse. ○ ○
When reset input is ON, all relays from D1 to
D2 turn OFF.
The state is not shifted to relays D2 +1 onwards.
Memory switch instruction
Memory
MEMSW Sets a memory switch. ○ ○
switch
Step instructions
APPENDICES
ENDS Ends the relay of the currently executing stage. ○ ○
Stage
Sets D with S ON when the execution
processing W-ON ○ ○
condition is ON.
A-21
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Flow instructions
A-22
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
* Note: Arithmetic operation instructions preceded with @ are differential execution type instructions.
APPENDICES
BMOV ○
.S
FMOV ○
Batch moves the same 32-bit data to a specified
.D device.
.L
A-23
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Arithmetic/comparison instructions
Adds 16-bit data.
.U ○
16-bit 16-bit
internal register + S = internal register
.S 16 bits 16 bits
(1 word)
16 bits
ADD Adds 32-bit data. ○
.D Upper Lower Upper Lower
32-bit
internal register + S +1 S = 32-bit
internal register
.L 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits
(2 words)
×
32-bit 32-bit
internal register S +1 S = TM001 TM000 internal register
.L 32 bits 32 bits 64 bits
(2 words)
.S 16 bits
(1 word)
* The upper 16 bits of the quotient are stored to both the upper
DIV 16 bits of the 32-bit internal register and to the TM000. ○
Divides 32-bit data.
.D TM001 TM000 32-bit
÷ S +1 S
internal register
64 bits 32 bits
(2 words)
32-bit
= TM001 TM000 internal register Remainder: TM003 TM002
.L 64 bits 32 bits
(2 words)
.U ○
Increments D by 1 and stores the result to D .
.S
INC ○
.D Increments [ D y D +1] by 1 and stores the result to
.L [ D y D +1].
.U ○
Decrements D by 1 and stores the result to D .
.S
DEC ○
.D Decrements [ D y D +1] by 1 and stores the result to
.L [ D y D +1].
A-24
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Arithmetic/comparison instructions (continued)
APPENDICES
.D [ S1 y S1 +1]<[ S2 y S2 +1])
Arithmetic Flag State
Value in 32-bit internal register is smaller than
specified range. CR2009→ON
32-bit internal register<[ S1 y S1 +1]<[ S2 y S2 +1]
Value in 32-bit internal register is within
specified range. CR2010→ON
[ S1 y S1 +1]≤32-bit internal register≤[ S2 y S2 +1]
.L Value in 32-bit internal register is greater than
specified range. CR2011→ON
[ S1 y S1 +1]<[ S2 y S2 +1]<32-bit internal register
A-25
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Logical arithmetic instructions
Inverts the state of each bit of the 16-bit internal
.U ○
register.
COM ○
Inverts the state of each bit of the 32-bit internal
.D
register.
.U ○
16-bit
internal register 0000011101000000 1100 1
Upper n bit Delete
"0" is stored. 1
SRA CR2009
(Carry) ○
Shifts the data in the 32-bit internal register to the
right by the number of specified bits.
bit bit ( n –1) bit
31 32-bit internal register 0
1
"0" is stored.
CR2009
APPENDICES
(Carry)
.U ○
16-bit
internal register 1110 100000011001 00000
Delete Upper n bit
1 "0" is stored.
SLA CR2009 ○
(Carry)
1
"0" is stored.
CR2009
(Carry)
A-26
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Data shift instructions (continued)
Rotates the data in the 16-bit internal register to
the right by the number of specified bits.
bit bit
CR2009 15 0
16-bit
0 1111000000001111 internal register
Flag state varies according
to result of previous arith- (Rotated once)
metic operation.
.U CR2009 ○
1 0111100000000111
(Carry)
Rotated n times (Above processing is repeated n times.)
bit bit
CR2009 15 0
16-bit
0 1111011110000000 internal register
(Carry)
RRA ○
Rotates the data in the 32-bit internal register to
the right by the number of specified bits.
bit bit bit bit
CR2009 31 16 15 32-bit internal register 0
0 11110000000011110000000000001111
Flag state varies according
to result of previous arith- (Rotated once)
metic operation.
.D CR2009
1 01111000000001111000000000000111
(Carry)
Rotated n times (Above processing is repeated n times.)
bit bit
CR2009 31 32-bit internal register 0
0 11110111100000000111100000000000
(Carry)
.U CR2009
○
1110000000011110 1
(Carry)
Rotated n times (Above processing is repeated n times.)
bit bit
15 0 CR2009
16-bit
0000000111101111 0 internal register
APPENDICES
(Carry)
RLA ○
Rotates the data in the 32-bit internal register to
the left by the number of specified bits.
bit bit bit bit
31 16 15 32-bit internal register 0 CR2009
11110000000011110000000000001111 0
Flag state varies according
(Rotated once) to result of previous arith-
metic operation.
.D CR2009
11100000000111100000000000011110 1
(Carry)
Rotated n times (Above processing is repeated n times.)
bit bit
31 32-bit internal register 0 CR2009
00000001111000000000000111101111 0
(Carry)
A-27
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
S 1000 0
S +1 2000 0
"0" is stored.
0
0
n1
items S + n2 1000
.U ( S +1) + n2 2000
8000
S + n1 –1 9000
n2
items 8000
( S +1 ( n1 –1) + n2 9000
WSR ○
Shifts 32-bit data to the right.
Before execution After execution
S +1 100000 S 0
S +3 200000 S +2 0
"0" is stored.
0
0
n1
.D
( S +1) +2 n1 100000 S +2 n2
items
( S +3) +2 n2 200000 ( S +2) +2 n2
800000
S +2 ( n1 –1) +1 900000 S +2 ( n1 –1)
n2
800000
items
( S +2 ( n1 –1) +1) +2 n2 900000 ( S +2 ( n1 –1) +2 n2
S – n2 1000
( S +1) – n2 2000
n2
items
S 1000
.U S +1 2000
8000
( S + n1 –1) – n2 9000
n1
items 0
0
"0" is stored.
APPENDICES
8000 0
S + n1 –1 9000 0
WSL ○
Shifts 32-bit data to the left.
Before execution After execution
( S +1) –2 n1 100000 S –2 n2
( S +3) –2 n2 200000 ( S +2) –2 n2
n2
items
S +1 100000 S
.D S +3 200000 S +2
800000
( S +2 ( n1 –1) +1) –2 n2 900000 ( S +2 ( n1 –1) –2 n2
n1 0
items
0
"0" is stored.
800000 0
S +2 ( n1 –1) +1 900000 S +2 ( n1 –1) 0
A-28
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Data conversion instruction
.U Converts the content of 16-bit internal register to BCD. ○
TBCD ○
.D Converts the content of 32-bit internal register to BCD.
Converts the content of 16-bit internal register to
.U ○
binary.
TBIN ○
Converts the content of 32-bit internal register to
.D
binary.
Decodes on digit in 16-bit internal register to 16 bits.
n (#1)th digit
#3 #2 #1 #0
16-bit
internal register 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
MPX 7 n ○ ○
Bit 7 of 16-bit
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 internal register is
16-bit turned ON ("1" is
internal register 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 stored) as (#1)th
digit is "0111"
(decimal 7).
16-bit
internal register 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
"7" (hex 0111) is stored to the 16-bit internal register
as the uppermost bit of ON ("1") bits is bit 7.
APPENDICES
data.
Disperses 16-bit data to nibble (4-bit) units, and stores
the nibbles to four word devices.
bit bit bit bit
15 8 7 0
1 2 3 4 : S bit bit bit bit
15 8 7 0
DISN 0 0 0 4 : D ○
0 0 0 3 : D +1
0 0 0 2 : D +2
0 0 0 1 : D +3
A-29
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Data conversion instructions (continued)
Disperses 16-bit data to byte (8-bit) units, and
stores the bytes to two word devices.
bit bit bit bit
15 8 7 0
DISB S : 1 2 3 4 bit
15
bit bit
8 7
bit
0
○
D : 0 0 3 4
D +1 : 0 0 1 2
"0" is stored to the upper bytes (8 bytes).
After
execution 3 4 1 2 ←16-bit internal register: $3412
SWAP Swaps the upper and lower data of the 32-bit ○
internal register.
↓32-bit internal register: $12345678
bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit
31 2423 16 15 8 7 0
.D Before
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
execution
After 1 2 3 4
execution 5 6 7 8
↑32-bit internal register: $56781234
.U 1 2 3 4 A B C D
APPENDICES
XCH A B C D 1 2 3 4 ○
Exchanges 32-bit data.
Before execution After execution
bit bit bit bit
31 S1 +1 S1 0 31 S1 +1 S1 0
.D 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A-30
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Floating point instructions (continued)
Converts the floating point type real number
.U currently stored in 16-bit internal register to binary
data.
Before execution After execution
bit bit bit bit
.S 31 32-bit internal register 0 15 16-bit internal register 0
16-bit unsigned
Floating point type real number binary data
Conversion INTG 32 bits 16 bits ○
Converts the floating point type real number
.D currently stored in 32-bit internal register to binary
data.
bit Before execution bit bit After execution bit
.L 31 32-bit internal register 0 31 32-bit internal register 0
APPENDICES
Moves floating point type real number values.
Move destination
D +1 D
Move destination
DM00201: +1.234 :DM00200
FMOV.F S +1 S DM00203: +1.234 :DM00202 ○
DM00101: +1.234 :DM00100 DM00205: +1.234 :DM00204
DM00207: +1.234 :DM00206
DM00209: +1.234 :DM00208
A-31
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Floating point instructions (continued)
Units the mantissa and exponent to form a floating
point type real number.
Mantissas/ Mantissa section:
Exponent S1 +1 S1
↑ Signed 32-bit binary data D +1 D
UNIF ○
↓ 32 bits
(2 words)
Coupling
Floating point type real number
Floating point Exponent section: 32 bits
S2
conversion [Coupling Floating point type integer
Signed 16-bit example] –3
binary data –1.234 10
16 bits
(1 word) Mantissa Exponent
32 bits
A-32
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Floating point instructions (continued)
Calculates the exponent function that takes a
floating point type real number as its quotient.
EXP 32-bit internal register 32-bit internal register ○
Quotient/
e ( Floating point type real number
32 bits
) Floating point type real number
32 bits
↑ ( Floating point type real number )° ( Floating point type real number ) RAD
32 bits 32 bits
↓
Converts the angle in radians of the floating point
Radian
type real number current stored to 32-bit internal
conversion
DEG register to degrees (°). ○
32-bit internal registerv 32-bit internal register
( Floating point type real number ) rad. ( Floating point type real number )°
32 bits 32 bits
APPENDICES
TAN currently stored to 32-bit internal register. ○
32-bit internal register 32-bit internal register
TAN ( Floating point type real number ) Floating point type real number
32 bits 32 bits
-1
Calculates the inverse cosine (cos ) value of the
Inverse floating point type real number currently stored to
trigonometric ACOS 32-bit internal register. ○
functions 32-bit internal register 32-bit internal register
-1
Calculates the inverse tangent (tan ) value of the
floating point type real number currently stored to
ATAN 32-bit internal register. ○
32-bit internal register 32-bit internal register
A-33
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Text processing instructions
Converts the lower order byte two digits in 16-bit
internal register to 2-digit ASCII text code.
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Decimal
matically
N stored at the
D +2: 1's U (00H)
↑ L end.
matically
N tion execu-
stored at the D +3: U (00H)
L tion
end.
.L 32 bits
D +2: 1,000,000's 100,000's
00H is automatically
stored at the end.
A-34
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Text processing instructions (continued)
Converts a decimal ASCII text string to 16-bit
unsigned binary data.
bit bit bit bit
15 S 0 15 D 0
.U S 10,000's 1,000's 16-bit unsigned binary data
16 bits
S +1: 100's 10's
N
S +2: 1's U (00H)
L NUL (00H) is required at end of text string.
Decimal S +3:
N
U (00H)
L NUL (00H) is required at end of text string.
↑
Converts a decimal ASCII text string to 32-bit
↓
RDASC unsigned binary data. ○
ASCII bit bit bit bit bit bit
15 S 0 31 D +1 16 15 D 0
string S 1,000,000,000's 100,000,000's 32-bit unsigned binary data
conversion 32 bits
.D S +1: 10,000,000's 1,000,000's
APPENDICES
S +4: 100's 10s
N
1's U (00H)
D +5: L NUL (00H) is required at end of text string.
S : A(41H) B(42H)
S +1: C(43H) D(44H)
Move SMOV S +2: E(45H)
N
U (00H)
L D : A(41H) B(42H) ○
G(47H) H(48H) D +1: C(43H) D(44H)
N
I(49H) J(4AH) D +2: E(45H) U (00H)
L
16 bits 16 bits
S1 A(41H) B(42H)
N
S1 +1 C(43H) U (00H)
L D A(41H) B(42H)
C(43H) D(44H)
Unite SADD D +1
○
D +2 E(45H) F(46H)
S2 D(44H) E(45H) G(47H)
N
U (00H)
D +3 L
S2 +1 F(46H) G(47H)
N
S2 +2 U (00H)
L
A-35
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Text processing instructions (continued)
Compares text strings.
Compare
Compare
S1 A(41H) B(42H) S2 A(41H) B(42H)
S1 +1 C(43H) D(44H) S2 +1 C(43H) D(44H)
S1 +2 E(45H) F(46H) S2 +2 E(45H) F(46H)
S1 +3 G(47H) H(48H) S2 +3 G(47H) H(48H)
S1 +4 I(49H) J(4AH) S2 +4 I(49H) J(4AH) Compare is
continued
S1 +5 K(4BH) L(4CH) S2 +5 K(4BH) L(4CH) until end
N N code (NUL
S1 +6 M(4DH) U
L (00H) S2 +6 N(4EH) U
L (00H) (00H)) is
found.
A-36
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Text processing instructions (continued)
Hex key
HKEY Enters hexadecimal key data. ○ ○
entry
count S + n –1 5678
Compare Result
2
APPENDICES
Compare
S +1 2345 that of the 16-bit internal
.U S +2 3456
Compare
register is stored is
searched. The result is
stored to the 16-bit
n items
internal register.
( n words) Compare
S + n –3 1234
Compare 16-bit internal register
S + n –2 3456 bit15 bit0
Compare Result
S + n –1 5678 S +2
A-37
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Data processing instructions
Searches for the maximum value in a specified
range.
bit bit
15 0
S 1234
.U S +1 2345
16-bit internal register
S +2 3456 bit15 bit0
Largest value
n items 9876
is stored.
S + n —3 9876
( n words)
S + n —2 8765
S + n —1 7654
MAX ○
Searches for the maximum value in a specified
range.
bit bit bit bit
31 16 15 0
S +1 12345678 S
.D
Largest 32-bit internal register
S +3 23456789 S +2
value bit bit
S +5 34567890 S +4 is stored. 31 0
n items 98765432
S +2( n —3)+1 98765432 S +2( n —3)
(2 n words)
S +2( n —2)+1 87654321 S +2( n —2)
S +2( n —1)+1 76543210 S +2( n —1)
Search
Searches for the minimum value in a specified
range.
bit bit
15 0
S 1234
S + n —2 8765
S + n —1 9876
MIN ○
Searches for the minimum value in a specified
range.
bit bit bit bit
31 16 15 0
S +1 12345678 S
.D
Smallest 32-bit internal register
S +3 23456789 S +2
value bit bit
S +5 34567890 S +4 is stored. 31 0
n items 12345678
S +2( n —3)+1 76543210 S +2( n —3)
(2 n words)
S +2( n —2)+1 87654321 S +2( n —2)
S +2( n —1)+1 98765432 S +2( n —1)
A-38
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Data processing instructions (continued)
Calculates the average value of a specified range.
bit bit
15 0
S 16
S +1 256
.U S +2 4096
n items Average value is stored to
16-bit internal register.
S + n —3 16383
( n words) 16-bit internal register
S + n —2 32767 bit15 bit0
Average
S + n —1 65535 Average value
Batch
ZRES Batch-resets a specified range. ○ ○
reset
.U
FIFOW Writes data to the FIFO table. ○
.D
FIFO
processing
.U
FIFOR Reads data from the FIFO table. ○
.D
.U Extends values in 16-bit internal register to 32-bit
APPENDICES
data.
32-bit internal register
.S 16-bit
internal register Upper Lower
EXT(.U/.S) 16-bit
TM000 internal register
Extension EXT ○
A-39
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Clock processing instructions
Writes the time data to the calendar timer.
bit bit
15 0
S +2 : Day 1 to 31
WTIME All data is described in 16-bit binary data format.
○
S +3 : Hour 0 to 23
S +4 : Minute 0 to 59
S +5 : Second 0 to 59
Day of week is expressed as 0: (Sunday),
Clock S +6 : Day of week 0 to 6 1: (Monday), 2: (Tuesday), 3: (Wednesday),
4: (Thursday), 5: (Friday), and 6: (Saturday).
processing
High-speed
counter Compares the setting value with the current value
of the high-speed counter in the hardware, and
CTC ○ ○
sets the high-speed counter when values are
equaled.
A-40
2 List of Instructions
Device Compatibility
Category Mnemonic Symbol Description of Instruction
KV-700 KV-10/16/24/40
Positioning instructions
APPENDICES
A-41
3 List of Device Nos.
KV-700
Model No. KV-700 KV-700+M
CPU input relay 00000 to 00009
CPU output relay 00500 to 00503
APPENDICES
A-42
3 List of Device Nos.
KV-10/16/24/40 Devices
Special auxiliary relays
Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
2002 R ON at all times
2003 R OFF at all times
2004 R 10 ms clock pulse (duty 50%)
2005 R 100 ms clock pulse (duty 50%)
2006 R 1s clock pulse (duty 50%)
2007 R OFF only for 1 scan at start of operation
2008 R ON only for 1 scan at start of operation
2009 R ON when result of arithmetic operation is minus or overflows
2010 R ON when result of arithmetic operation is zero
2011 R ON when result of arithmetic operation is plus
2012 R ON at arithmetic operation execution error
2100 R CTH0 dedicated internal clock (1 µs)
2101 R CTH0 dedicated internal clock (10 µs)
2102 R CTH0 dedicated internal clock (100 µs)
ON: Execute.
2103 Automatically clear CTH0.
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Disable output.
2104 Operation when high- Disable/enable direct output to 0500.
OFF: Enable output.
speed counter comparator
ON: Execute.
2105 CTC0 is ON Turn OFF direct output to 0500.
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
2106 Turn ON direct output to 0500.
OFF: Do not execute.
Invert ON/OFF of output to 0500 each time that high-speed counter ON: Execute.
2107
comparator CTC0 turns ON. OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Disable output.
2108 Disable/enable direct output to 0500.
OFF: Enable output.
Operation when high-
ON: Execute.
2109 speed counter comparator Turn OFF direct output to 0500.
OFF: Do not execute.
CTC1 is ON
ON: Execute.
2110 Turn ON direct output to 0500.
OFF: Do not execute.
Invert ON/OFF of output to 0500 each time that high-speed counter ON: Execute.
2111
comparator CTC1 turns ON. OFF: Do not execute.
Automatically clear CTH0 when high-speed counter comparator CTC1 is ON: Execute.
2112
ON. OFF: Do not execute.
2113 Stepped mode 1 pulse 2X 4X 2 pulses
High speed counter CTH0 count input 2113 OFF ON OFF ON
mode selection. 2114 OFF OFF ON ON
2114
2200 R CTH1 dedicated internal clock (1 µs)
APPENDICES
2201 R CTH1 dedicated internal clock (10 µs)
2202 R CTH1 dedicated internal clock (100 µs)
ON: Execute.
2203 Automatically clear CTH1
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Disable output.
2204 Operation when high- Disable/enable direct output to 0501.
OFF: Enable output.
speed counter comparator
ON: Execute.
2205 CTC2 is ON Turn OFF direct output to 0501.
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
2206 Turn ON direct output to 0501.
OFF: Do not execute.
Invert ON/OFF of output to 0501 each time that high-speed counter ON: Execute.
2207
comparator CTC2 turns ON. OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Disable output.
2208 Disable/enable direct output to 0501.
OFF: Enable output.
Operation when high-
ON: Execute.
2209 speed counter comparator Turn OFF direct output to 0501.
OFF: Do not execute.
CTC3 is ON
ON: Execute.
2210 Turn ON direct output to 0501.
OFF: Do not execute.
Invert ON/OFF of output to 0501 each time that high-speed counter ON: Execute.
2211
comparator CTC3 turns ON. OFF: Do not execute.
Automatically clear CTH1 when high-speed counter comparator CTC3 is ON: Execute.
2212
ON. OFF: Do not execute.
2213 Stepped mode 1 pulse 2X 4X 2 pulses
High speed counter CTH1 count input
2213 OFF ON OFF ON
mode selection.
2214 2214 OFF OFF ON ON
A-43
3 List of Device Nos.
Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
ON: Execute.
2300 Disable external outputs (0500 to 0915, outputs used on QL)
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
2301 Disable external input refreshing (0000 to 0415, inputs used on QL)
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Enabled
2303 Fixed scan time operation (setting value to TM29)
OFF: Disabled
2304 R ON for 1 scan only at fixed scan time setting value exceeded
2305 Frequency counter, operation start flag
ON: Execute.
2306 Specified frequency pulse output
OFF: Do not execute.
2307 Specified frequency pulse output, error flag
2308 Motor driver stop
2309 Motor driver operating: ON/emergency stop when motor driver is turned OFF by interrupt instruction
2310 Motor driver operation start (detected by up edge)
2314 Cam switch, operation start flag
2315 Cam switch, ON at error
2400 Stepped mode Unused Up edge Down edge Level
CTH0 external signal preset 2400 OFF ON OFF ON
2401 2401 OFF OFF ON ON
ON: Use.
2406 CTH0 ring counter
OFF: Do not use.
ON: Ignore B phase, and count up at all times.
2407 Ignore B phase in CTH0 unstepped mode
OFF: Use B phase as per normal.
2408 Stepped mode Unused Up edge Down edge Level
CTH1 external signal preset 2408 OFF ON OFF ON
2409 2409 OFF OFF ON ON
ON: Use.
2414 CTH1 ring counter
OFF: Do not use.
ON: Ignore B phase, and count up at all times.
2415 Ignore B phase in CTH1 unstepped mode
OFF: Use B phase as per normal.
2500 Operation panel KV-D30 F1 (customized switch 1)
2501 Operation panel KV-D30 F2 (customized switch 2)
2502 Operation panel KV-D30 F3 (customized switch 3)
2503 Operation panel KV-D30 F4 (customized switch 4)
2504 Operation panel KV-D30 LED1 (customized lamp 1)
2505 Operation panel KV-D30 LED2 (customized lamp 2)
2506 Operation panel KV-D30 LED3 (customized lamp 3)
2507 Operation panel KV-D30 LED4 (customized lamp 4)
2508 Operation panel KV-D30 green backlight
2509 Operation panel KV-D30 red backlight
ON: Japanese
2510 Operation panel KV-D30 system message
OFF: English
2511 Operation panel KV-D30 buzzer, external outputs 0.1
ON: Positive display
2512 Operation panel KV-D30, screen display setting
OFF: Negative display
2513 Operation panel KV-D30 reset relay (KV-D30 is reset at up edge, and then is forcibly turned OFF.)
ON: Display ON
2515 Error message display (content of DM1950)
OFF: Display OFF
A-44
3 List of Device Nos.
Attribute
Device Function
No. R: Read only
Blank: R/W
ON: 10µs
2609 Input time constant of extended input unit of relay No. 0100 to 0115
OFF: 10ms
ON: 10µs
2610 Input time constant of extended input unit of relay No. 0200 to 0215
OFF: 10ms
ON: 10µs
2611 Input time constant of extended input unit of relay No. 0300 to 0315
OFF: 10ms
ON: 10µs
2612 Input time constant of extended input unit of relay No. 0400 to 0415
OFF: 10ms
ON: Clear.
2613 Clear input at extended unit broken line.
OFF: Do not clear.
2614
Reserved for system
2615
ON: Enabled (detected at up edge)
2700 KL use enable/disable
OFF: Disabled
2701 156kbit/s 625kbit/s 2.5Mbit/s 5Mbit/s
KL baud rate 2701 OFF ON OFF ON
This area is saved
2702 2702 OFF OFF ON ON
when the Program
ON: 8bit mode is switched to
2704 KL communications type data selection
OFF: 16bit the Run mode and
ON: FINAL ON when the power is
2705 KL final address unit
OFF: FINAL OFF turned OFF. (This
ON: Clear does not affect the
2706 Clear input at KL broken line
OFF: Hold MEMSW instruction.)
2707 ON at KL setting error
It will not be cleared
ON: Enabled (detected at up edge)
2708 QL use enable even by clearing all
OFF: Disabled
auxiliary relays.
2709 250kbit/s 500kbit/s 1Mbit/s 2Mbit/s Note, however, that it
QL baud rate 2709 OFF ON OFF ON will be cleared when
2710 2710 OFF OFF ON ON auxiliary relays are
ON: Clear cleared with the
2711 Clear input at QL broken line ladder program
OFF: Hold
ON: Line broken unregistered.
2712 Broken line error
OFF: Normal
Use high-speed input compensation ON: Execute.
2714 circuit OFF: Do not execute.
2715 Cam switch, ON during operation
APPENDICES
2800 Communications port A: send break signal (sent while relay is ON)
Communications port A: receive text data
2801
ON for 1 scan only at reception of text data
Communications port A: text data download error
2802
ON for 1 scan only when text data is received while 2801 is ON or when 2803 is ON
Communications port A: receive text data error
2803
ON for 1 scan only at text data receive error
2804 Communications port A: start sending text data (ON while data is being sent)
2805 Communications port B: send break signal (sent while relay is ON)
Communications port B: receive text data
2806
ON for 1 scan only at reception of text data
Communications port B: text data download error
2807
ON for 1 scan only when text data is received while 2806 is ON or when 2808 is ON
Communications port B: receive text data error
2808
ON for 1 scan only at text data receive error
2809 Communications port B: start sending text data (ON while data is being sent)
2812 Turns ON at backup battery error.
Set the input time constant of all Basic Unit inputs. ON: Set.
2813 (excluding HSP instruction use input) OFF: Do not set. (10 ms)
2814 HKEY instruction, multiple keys disabled
2815 HKEY instruction, end of scan
2900
: HKEY instruction information storage area
2915
A-45
3 List of Device Nos.
Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
Trapezoidal control, startup frequency (Hz)
DM1480
(200 to 50000)
Trapezoidal control, operation frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz)
A-46
3 List of Device Nos.
KV-700 Devices
Control Relays CR
Control relays (CR0000 to CR3999) can be used for checking the operating state of
the CPU Unit, setting input time constants, setting high-speed counters, etc.
Control relays currently reserved for the system cannot be used.
Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CR0000 Reserved for system
: :
CR0715 Reserved for system
CR0800
: Reserved for system
CR0915
CR1000 Reserved for system
: :
CR1715 Reserved for system
ON: Enabled
CR1800 Reserved for system
OFF: Disabled
CR1801 Reserved 156kbit/s 625kbit/s 2.5Mbit/s 5Mbit/s
for CR1801 OFF ON OFF ON
CR1802 system CR1802 OFF OFF ON ON
State is also held when
ON: Clear power is turned OFF
CR1803 Reserved for system and mode is switched
OFF: Hold
between Run and
ON: Broken Program.
CR1804 Reserved for system
OFF: Normal
CR1805
: Reserved for system
CR1813
Cam switch function, ON: Absolute
CR1814
absolute/incremental OFF: Incremental
Cam switch function, cam switch function stopped when turn
APPENDICES
CR1815
ON and OFF during operation
CR1900
: Reserved for system
CR2001
CR2002 R ON at all times
CR2003 R OFF at all times
CR2004 R 10 ms clock pulse (at 50% duty)
CR2005 R 100 ms clock pulse (at 50% duty)
CR2006 R 1s clock pulse (at 50% duty)
CR2007 R OFF only for 1 scan at start of operation
CR2008 R ON only for 1 scan at start of operation
CR2009 ON when result of arithmetic operation is minus or overflows
CR2010 R ON when result of arithmetic operation is zero
CR2011 R ON when result of arithmetic operation is plus
CR2012 R ON at arithmetic operation execution error
CR2013
: Reserved for system
CR2015
A-47
3 List of Device Nos.
Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CR2100 R CTH0 dedicated internal clock (1 µs)
CR2101 R CTH0 dedicated internal clock (10 µs)
CR2102 R CTH0 dedicated internal clock (100 µs)
ON: Execute.
CR2103 Automatically clear CTH0.
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Disable output.
CR2104 Operation when high- Disable/enable direct output to 00500.
OFF: Enable output.
speed counter
comparator CTC0 is ON ON: Execute.
CR2105 Turn OFF direct output to 00500.
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
CR2106 Turn ON direct output to 00500.
OFF: Do not execute.
Invert ON/OFF of output to 00500 each time that high-speed counter ON: Execute.
CR2107
comparator CTC0 turns ON. OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Disable output.
CR2108 Disable/enable direct output to 00500.
OFF: Enable output.
Operation when high-
ON: Execute.
CR2109 speed counter Turn OFF direct output to 00500.
OFF: Do not execute.
comparator CTC1 is ON
ON: Execute.
CR2110 Turn ON direct output to 00500.
OFF: Do not execute.
Invert ON/OFF of output to 00500 each time that high-speed counter ON: Execute.
CR2111
comparator CTC1 turns ON. OFF: Do not execute.
Automatically clear CTH0 when high-speed counter comparator CTC1 is ON: Execute.
CR2112
ON. OFF: Do not execute.
CR2113 Single-phase
1X 2X 4X 2 pulses
High-speed counter W/out direction W/ direction
CR2114 CTH0 count input mode CR2113 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
selection. CR2114 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
CR2115 CR2115 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
ON: Execute.
CR2300 Disable external outputs (including QL)
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
CR2301 Disable external input refreshing (including QL)
OFF: Do not execute.
CR2302 Reserved for system
ON: Enabled
CR2303 Fixed scan time operation
OFF: Disabled
CR2304 R ON for 1 scan only at fixed scan time setting value exceeded
Set input time constant of all CPU Unit inputs. ON: Set.
CR2305
(Determine referring to CM1620 when ON.) OFF: Do not set. (10 ms)
CR2306 R ON at backup battery error
CR2307
: Reserved for system
CR2315
A-48
3 List of Device Nos.
Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CR2400 Unused Up edge Down edge Level
CTH0 external signal preset CR2400 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2401 CR2401 OFF OFF ON ON
ON: Use.
CR2402 CTH0 ring counter
OFF: Do not use.
CR2403 Reserved for system
CR2404 Unused Up edge Down edge Level
CTH1 external signal preset CR2404 OFF ON OFF ON
CR2405 CR2405 OFF OFF ON ON
ON: Use.
CR2406 CTH1 ring counter
OFF: Do not use.
CR2407
: Reserved for system
CR2413
ON: Execute.
CR2414 Specified frequency pulse output
OFF: Do not execute.
CR2415 Specified frequency pulse output, error
ON: Execute.
CR2500 Frequency counter, start of operation
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: rpm
CR2503 Frequency counter, Hz/rpm switching
OFF: Hz
ON: Use.
CR2504 Frequency counter, user function for updating rpm by single rotation
OFF: Do not use.
CR2505
: Reserved for system
CR2507
ON: Execute.
CR2508 Cam switch, start of operation
OFF: Do not execute.
Cam switch, output response impossible warning (generated when output does not track during cam
CR2509
switch operation)
CR2510 R Cam switch, error
CR2511
: Reserved for system
APPENDICES
CR2615
CR2708
: Reserved for system
CR2715
CR2800 Serial communications, send break signal (sent while relay is ON)
CR2801 R Serial communications, ON for 1 scan only at reception of text data
CR2802 R Serial communications, text data download error
A-49
3 List of Device Nos.
Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CR2803 R Serial communications, ON for 1 scan only at text data receive error
CR2804 Serial communications, start sending text data (ON while data is being sent)
ON: Perform.
CR2805 Serial communications, receive text data in word units
OFF: Do not perform.
ON: Perform.
CR2806 Serial communications, send text data in word units
OFF: Do not perform.
CR2807
: Reserved for system
CR2813
ON: Execute.
CR2814 Suppress zero during execution of DASC instruction (all suffixes)
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
CR2815 Omit + sign during execution of DASC.S, DASC.L and DASC.F.
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
CR2900 Access window, display user message 1
OFF: Do not execute.
ON: Execute.
CR2901 Access window, display user message 2
OFF: Do not execute.
CR2902
: Reserved for system
CR2915
CR3000 X-axis, limit switch CW input
CR3001 X-axis, limit switch CCW input
CR3002 X-axis, origin sensor input
CR3003 X-axis, stop sensor input
CR3004 R X-axis, zero return in operation
CR3005 X-axis, zero return completed
CR3006 Reserved for system
CR3007 X-axis, error/clear error
CR3008 X-axis, warning/clear warning
CR3009 X-axis, ON during pulse output/emergency stop
CR3010 X-axis, start driver operation
CR3011 X-axis, change current value request (level detection)
APPENDICES
A-50
3 List of Device Nos.
Attribute
Device No. R: Read only Function
Blank: R/W
CR3200
Logging function, trigger setting
CR3201
CR3202 Logging function, time stamp ON
CR3203 Logging function, start
CR3204 Logging function, write during operation
CR3205 Logging function, CPU buffer overflow
CR3206 Logging function, registered device error
CR3207 Logging function, write error
CR3208 Logging function, MMC data overflow
CR3209 Logging function, MMC insufficient free space
CR3210 Logging function, logging execution in progress
CR3211
: Reserved for system
CR3215
CR3300 Alarm 0
: Alarm relay :
CR3415 Alarm 31
CR3500 R Turn ON if one of alarm relays CR3300 to CR3415 is ON.
ON: Leave history.
CR3501 Leave history when alarm relay state changes to OFF from ON.
OFF: Do not leave history.
CR3502
: Reserved for system
CR3513
CR3514 HKEY instruction, multiple keys disabled
CR3515 R HKEY instruction, end of scan
CR3600
: R HKEY instruction information storage area
CR3615
CR3700 Operation panel KV-D30, F1 (customized switch 1)
CR3701 Operation panel KV-D30, F2 (customized switch 2)
CR3702 Operation panel KV-D30, F3 (customized switch 3)
CR3703 Operation panel KV-D30, F4 (customized switch 4)
CR3704 Operation panel KV-D30, LED1 (customized lamp 1)
CR3705 Operation panel KV-D30, LED2 (customized lamp 2)
CR3706 Operation panel KV-D30, LED3 (customized lamp 3)
APPENDICES
CR3707 Operation panel KV-D30, LED4 (customized lamp 4)
CR3708 Operation panel KV-D30, green backlight (lights when ON)
CR3709 Operation panel KV-D30, red backlight (lights when ON)
ON: Japanese
CR3710 Operation panel KV-D30, system message display
OFF: English
ON: Sound.
CR3711 Operation panel KV-D30, sound buzzer
OFF: Turn off.
ON: Positive display
CR3712 Operation panel KV-D30, screen display setting
OFF: Negative display
ON: Enabled
CR3713 Operation panel KV-D30, enable alarm interrupt
OFF: Disabled
Operation panel KV-D30, page switching
CR3714
(Switch to page of CM0401 value is forcibly turned OFF by up edge.)
ON: Disabled
CR3715 Operation panel KV-D30, page switching by / keys disabled
OFF: Enabled
CR3800 Operation panel KV-D30, output 0 ON when panel is ON
CR3801 Operation panel KV-D30, output 1 ON when panel is ON
CR3802
: Reserved for system
CR3915
A-51
3 List of Device Nos.
Control Memory CM
Control memories (CM0000 to CM3999) are used for setting the various special
functions of the CPU Unit. CMs reserved for the system cannot be used.
Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CM0000 1st line display device setting
CM0001 1st line display device setting
CM0002 2nd line display device setting
CM0003 2nd line display device setting
CM0004 Operation panel KV-D30 3rd line display device setting
CM0005 page 0 3rd line display device setting
CM0006 4th line display device setting
CM0007 4th line display device setting
CM0008
Reserved for system
CM0009
CM0010 Page 1, display device setting
: Operation panel KV-D30 :
CM0189 Page 18, display device setting
CM0190 1st line display device setting
CM0191 1st line display device setting
CM0192 2nd line display device setting
CM0193 2nd line display device setting
CM0194 Operation panel KV-D30 3rd line display device setting
CM0195 page 19 3rd line display device setting
CM0196 4th line display device setting
CM0197 4th line display device setting
CM0198
Reserved for system
APPENDICES
CM0199
CM0200 1st line display attribute setting
CM0201 1st line display attribute setting
CM0202 2nd line display attribute setting
CM0203 2nd line display attribute setting
CM0204 Operation panel KV-D30 3rd line display attribute setting
CM0205 page 0 3rd line display attribute setting
CM0206 4th line display attribute setting
CM0207 4th line display attribute setting
CM0208 Template 1 setting
CM0209 Template 2 setting
CM0210 Page 1, display attribute setting
: Operation panel KV-D30 :
CM0389 Page 2, display attribute setting
A-52
3 List of Device Nos.
Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CM0390 1st line display attribute setting
CM0391 1st line display attribute setting
CM0392 2nd line display attribute setting
CM0393 2nd line display attribute setting
CM0394 Operation panel KV-D30 3rd line display attribute setting
CM0395 page 19 3rd line display attribute setting
CM0396 4th line display attribute setting
CM0397 4th line display attribute setting
CM0398 Template 1 setting
CM0399 Template 2 setting
CM0400 Operation panel KV-D30, move enable/disable setting
CM0401 Operation panel KV-D30, page switching setting
CM0402 Operation panel KV-D30, current display page
CM0403
: Reserved for system
CM0409
CM0410
Operation panel KV-D30, used by CM direct accessing
CM0411
CM0412
Operation panel KV-D30, used by CM direct accessing
CM0413
CM0414
Operation panel KV-D30, used by CM direct accessing
CM0415
CM0416
: Reserved for system
CM0699
CM0700 R Read from calendar (year)
CM0701 R Read from calendar (month)
CM0702 R Read from calendar (day)
CM0703 R Read from calendar (hour)
APPENDICES
CM0704 R Read from calendar (minute)
CM0705 R Read from calendar (second)
CM0706 R Read from calendar (day of week)
CM0707
: Reserved for system
CM0719
Scan time measurement value (Average value of each tens scans is entered to this
CM0720 R
memory.) (in 0.1 ms units)
CM0721 Fixed scan time operation setting value (in 1 ms units)
Scan time (in 1 ms units) when the setting value is exceeded during fixed scan time
CM0722 R
operation is entered to this memory.
CM0723
: Reserved for system
CM0999
CM1000 Number of received text data
CM1001 Received text data 1
: R :
CM1099 Received text data 99
A-53
3 List of Device Nos.
Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CM1100 Number of sent text data
CM1101 Received sent data 1
: R :
CM1199 Received sent data 99
CM1200
: Reserved for system
CM1399
CM1400 Cam switch function, set leading output relay No.
CM1401 Cam switch function, comparator value in multi-stage compare mode
CM1402 Cam switch function, number of pulses in cycle of device input to CTH0
CM1403 Cam switch function, absolute type input address
CM1404 R Cam switch function, current angle
CM1405 R Cam switch function, error No.
CM1406
: Reserved for system
CM1409
CM1410
Cam switch function, angle setting value for turning output relay ON/OFF
CM1411
CM1412 angle setting value for turning output +1 relay ON/OFF
: Cam switch function, :
CM1471 angle setting value for turning output +30 relay ON/OFF
CM1472
Cam switch function, angle setting value for turning output +31 relay ON/OFF
CM1473
CM1474
: Reserved for system
CM1479
CM1480 R
Frequency counter function, frequency measurement results (Hz/rpm)
APPENDICES
CM1481 R
CM1482 Frequency counter function, measurement cycle (ms)
CM1483 Frequency counter function, average number of measurements
CM1484
: Reserved for system
CM1489
CM1490
Specified frequency pulse output function, set frequency (Hz)
CM1491
CM1492
: Reserved for system
CM1499
CM1500 Reserved for system
: R :
CM1531 Reserved for system
CM1532 Reserved for system
: R :
CM1563 Reserved for system
A-54
3 List of Device Nos.
Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CM1564 Reserved for system
CM1565
: Reserved for system
CM1569
CM1570
: Reserved for system
CM1577
CM1578
: Reserved for system
CM1599
CM1600
CTH0 ring counter upper limit value
CM1601
CM1602
CTH1 ring counter upper limit value
CM1603
CM1604
CTH0 preset input
CM1605
CM1606
CTH1 preset input
CM1607
CM1608
Reserved for system
CM1609
CM1610 R
Input capture at INT0 generation
CM1611 R
CM1612 R
Input capture at INT1 generation
CM1613 R
CM1614 R
Input capture at INT2 generation
CM1615 R
CM1616 R
Input capture at INT3 generation
CM1617 R
CM1618
Reserved for system
APPENDICES
CM1619
CM1620 Input time constant setting
CM1621
: Reserved for system
CM1699
CM1700
Digital trimmer 0 upper limit value
CM1701
CM1702
Digital trimmer 1 upper limit value
CM1703
CM1704
Digital trimmer 2 upper limit value
CM1705
CM1706
Digital trimmer 3 upper limit value
CM1707
CM1708
Digital trimmer 4 upper limit value
CM1709
CM1710
Digital trimmer 5 upper limit value
CM1711
A-55
3 List of Device Nos.
Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CM1712
Digital trimmer 6 upper limit value
CM1713
CM1714
Digital trimmer 7 upper limit value
CM1715
CM1716
: Reserved for system
CM1719
CM1720 Access window, user message 1
CM1721
: Access window, user message 2 (max. 32 characters)
CM1737
CM1738 Access window, operation disabled setting
CM1739
: Reserved for system
CM1999
CM2000 X-axis, I/O setting
CM2001 X-axis, sensor enable
CM2002
X-axis, current value comparator 0
CM2003
CM2004
X-axis, current value comparator 1
CM2005
CM2006 X-axis, zero return: startup frequency
CM2007 X-axis, zero return: acceleration/deceleration time
CM2008
X-axis, zero return: operation frequency
CM2009
CM2010 X-axis, jog operation: startup frequency
CM2011 X-axis, jog operation: acceleration/deceleration time
APPENDICES
CM2012
X-axis, jog operation: operation frequency
CM2013
CM2014
X-axis, change current value setting value
CM2015
CM2016
X-axis, change operation speed setting value in speed control mode
CM2017
CM2018 Reserved for system
CM2019 X-axis, M code
CM2020 R
X-axis, output pulse current value
CM2021 R
CM2022 R
X-axis, output frequency current value
CM2023 R
CM2024 X-axis, error code
CM2025 X-axis, operation point No.
CM2026
: Reserved for system
CM2029
A-56
3 List of Device Nos.
Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CM2030 Y-axis, I/O setting
CM2031 Y-axis, sensor enable
CM2032
Y-axis, current value comparator 0
CM2033
CM2034
Y-axis, current value comparator 1
CM2035
CM2036 Y-axis, zero return: startup frequency
CM2037 Y-axis, zero return: acceleration/deceleration time
CM2038
Y-axis, zero return: operation frequency
CM2039
CM2040 Y-axis, jog operation: startup frequency
CM2041 Y-axis, jog operation: acceleration/deceleration time
CM2042
Y-axis, jog operation: operation frequency
CM2043
CM2044
Y-axis, change current value setting value
CM2045
CM2046
Y-axis, change operation speed setting value in speed control mode
CM2047
CM2048 Reserved for system
CM2049 Y-axis, M code
CM2050 R
Y-axis, output pulse current value
CM2051 R
CM2052 R
Y-axis, output frequency current value
CM2053 R
CM2054 Y-axis, error code
CM2055 Y-axis, operation point No.
CM2056
APPENDICES
: Reserved for system
CM2059
CM2060
Target value/travel
CM2061
CM2062 Startup frequency
CM2063 Acceleration/deceleration time
CM2064 CPU positioning function
Operation frequency
CM2065 Point parameter 0
CM2066 Operation mode
CM2067 Number of specified stop sensor pulses
CM2068
Reserved for system
CM2069
CM2070 Point parameter 1
: CPU positioning function :
CM2369 Point parameter 30
A-57
3 List of Device Nos.
Attribute
Device
R: Read only Function
No.
Blank: R/W
CM2370
Target value/travel
CM2371
CM2372 Startup frequency
CM2373 Acceleration/deceleration time
CM2374 CPU positioning function
Operation frequency
CM2375 Point parameter 31
CM2376 Operation mode
CM2377 Number of specified stop sensor pulses
CM2378
Reserved for system
CM2379
CM2380
: Reserved for system
CM2599
CM2600
Logging function, device type 0
CM2601
CM2602 device type 1
: Logging function, :
CM2661 device type 30
CM2662
Logging function, device type 31
CM2663
CM2664 trigger selection details 0
: Logging function, :
CM2670 trigger selection details 6
CM2671 Logging function, number of registered devices
CM2672 Logging function, Memory Card storage capacity
CM2673
: Reserved for system
APPENDICES
CM3999
A-58
4 List of Conversion Rules
APPENDICES
Turn ON direct output to 500 when CTC0 is ON 2106 CR2106
Invert output to 500 when CTC1 is ON 2107 CR2107
Enable direct output to 500 when CTC1 is ON 2108 CR2108
Turn OFF direct output to 500 when CTC1 is ON 2109 CR2109
Turn ON direct output to 500 when CTC1 is ON 2110 CR2110
Invert output to 500 when CTC1 is ON 2111 CR2111
Automatically clear CTH1 when CTC1 is ON 2112 CR2112
Enable CTH0 stepped mode 2113 Unconvertible
Select CTH0 stepped mode 2114 Unconvertible
Unused 2115 2115
Special auxiliary CTH1 dedicated internal clock (1 µs) 2200 CR2200
relays for high-speed CTH1 dedicated internal clock (10 µs) 2201 CR2201
counter (1)
CTH1 dedicated internal clock (100 µs) 2202 CR2202
Automatically clear CTH1 when CTC2 is ON 2203 CR2203
Enable direct output to 501 when CTC2 is ON 2204 CR2204
Turn OFF direct output to 501 when CTC2 is ON 2205 CR2205
Turn ON direct output to 501 when CTC2 is ON 2206 CR2206
Invert direct output to 501 when CTC2 is ON 2207 CR2207
A-59
4 List of Conversion Rules
A-60
4 List of Conversion Rules
[Tip]
APPENDICES
About Unconvertible Devices
Relays or unconvertible special auxiliary relays occupied by units that do not
support the device conversion function are not converted and become invalid
operands with their original device Nos. intact.
A-61
4 List of Conversion Rules
[Tip]
About Unconvertible Devices
Relays or unconvertible special auxiliary relays occupied by units that do not
support the device conversion function are not converted and become invalid
operands with their original device Nos. intact.
A-62
4 List of Conversion Rules
[Tip]
About Unconvertible Devices
Relays or unconvertible special auxiliary relays occupied by units that do not
support the device conversion function are not converted and become invalid
operands with their original device Nos. intact.
APPENDICES
A-63
5 List of Sample Programs
A-64
6 List of Circuits Registered to Circuit Library
For KV-10/16/24/40
Folder Name Circuit Library Name
Positioning control functions Positioning control (basic operation)
Positioning control (jog operation)
Positioning control (palletizing)
Positioning control (pitch feed)
High-speed counter function Phase difference high-speed counter (for CTH0)
Phase difference high-speed counter (for CTH1)
Frequency counter function Frequency counter
Specified frequency pulse output function Specified frequency pulse output
Cam switch function Cam switch functions
Basic circuits ON delay circuit
OFF delay circuit
One-shot circuit
Flicker circuit
Alternate circuit
32-bit arithmetic operation 32-bit signed addition
32-bit signed subtraction
32-bit unsigned multiplication
32-bit unsigned division
Data memory processing Data memory initialization
Data memory block transfer
Data memory shift
APPENDICES
Serial communications Text data transmission/reception (for PortA)
Text data transmission/reception (for PortB)
Exclusive to KV-P16 How to use function switches
A-65
6 List of Circuits Registered to Circuit Library
For KV-700
Folder Name Circuit Library Name
CPU positioning function CPU positioning function (X-axis zero return)
CPU positioning function (Y-axis zero return)
CPU positioning function (X-axis jog operation)
CPU positioning function (Y-axis jog operation)
CPU positioning function (X-axis teaching)
CPU positioning function (Y-axis teaching)
CPU positioning function (X-axis pitch feed)
CPU positioning function (Y-axis pitch feed)
CPU positioning function (X-axis palletizing)
CPU positioning function (Y-axis palletizing)
CPU positioning function (X-axis speed control)
CPU positioning function (Y-axis speed control)
CPU positioning function (X-axis M code)
CPU positioning function (Y-axis M code)
Logging function Logging (executed on the hour every hour)
Logging (bit devices)
Logging (executed every other hour)
Calendar timer Calendar timer
Frequency counter function Frequency counter (Hz count)
Frequency counter (rpm count)
Cam switch function Cam switch function (incremental type)
Cam switch function (absolute type)
Cam switch function (64 point output)
Asynchronous control function Asynchronous control
Arithmetic operation Arithmetic operation (addition)
Arithmetic operation (subtraction)
Arithmetic operation (multiplication)
APPENDICES
A-66
6 List of Circuits Registered to Circuit Library
APPENDICES
A-67
7 List of Shortcut Key Commands
Unit Editor
z File
z Edit
z Convert
z Display
APPENDICES
z Window
A-68
7 List of Shortcut Key Commands
APPENDICES
A-69
7 List of Shortcut Key Commands
Editor
z File
z Edit
APPENDICES
A-70
7 List of Shortcut Key Commands
z Comment
z Find/replace
z Monitors/Simulator
APPENDICES
z Convert
A-71
7 List of Shortcut Key Commands
z Display
z Tools
z Help
A-72
7 List of Shortcut Key Commands
Monitor
z File
z Edit
APPENDICES
A-73
7 List of Shortcut Key Commands
z Comment
z Find
z PLC
z Monitor
APPENDICES
z Online Edit
z Display
A-74
7 List of Shortcut Key Commands
z Tools
z Help
APPENDICES
A-75
7 List of Shortcut Key Commands
Simulator
z File
z Find
z Execute
APPENDICES
z Display
z Help
A-76
7 List of Shortcut Key Commands
APPENDICES
z Operations in break conditions window
A-77
8 Programming Hints
8 Programming Hints
This appendix describes hints and precautions when you are programming ladder
programs.
A-78
8 Programming Hints
Programming Precautions
z Output coils, timers or
counters cannot be
connected directly from the
bus line. If such a
connection is required,
insert an NC contact of an
unused internal auxiliary or
special auxiliary circuit, or
special auxiliary relay 2002
(always ON contact) as a
dummy contact.
z Contacts cannot be
connected to output lines.
APPENDICES
A-79
8 Programming Hints
A B C D E F G
A B C D E F G
A I
Figure b: Ladder program that will not result in a reverse conversion error
APPENDICES
A-80
9 Remedies for Frequently Occurring Communications Errors
APPENDICES
z Is the modem assigned to the communications port?
On some PCs, a modem might already be assigned to the communications port.
If it is assigned, either disable the modem connection, or set a different
communications port.
A-81
9 Remedies for Frequently Occurring Communications Errors
A-82
10 Index
10 Index
1 step execution..................................................... 8-23 registered circuits, Replacing operands in .......6-99
16-, 32- and 64-point Unit Monitor....................... 7-117 Circuits Registered to Circuit Library, List of ......... A-65
KV-10/16/24/40, For ........................................ A-65
[A] KV-700, For ..................................................... A-66
A/D Conversion Unit Monitor ................................7-119 Clear All Devices .......................................... 7-72, 8-47
About Data Compatibility ....................................... 1-18 coils, Entering.........................................................6-61
About fixed scan .................................................... 8-21 comment files on other software, Reading and saving
About the format of text format comment files......6-114 ..............................................................................6-116
Areas, Copying, Moving and Deleting ................... 6-86 Comments
areas, Copying, moving and deleting .................... 6-90 Comments, Displaying/Hiding ....... 6-25, 7-52, 8-34
areas, Moving and deleting.............................. 6-90 comments, Reading........................................6-115
copied or cut ladder data, Pasting ................... 6-91 comments, Saving ..........................................6-114
other files, Copying from .................................. 6-92 Comments, Setting Transfer of.......................6-121
selected areas, Copying .................................. 6-90 comments and labels, Editing ..............................6-103
areas, Selecting ..................................................... 6-87 Comments and Labels on Ladder Diagrams, Directly
“Auto” button (Panel Editor)..................................... 9-8 Changing ..............................................................6-110
auto-load function ...................................................4-11 comments from other files, Reading ....................6-112
Common restrictions ................................................8-2
[B] Communications Port, Selecting the ......................7-20
Back 1 step execution............................................ 8-26 Serial port detailed setting ................................7-20
Backlight OFF time setting DM................................ 9-9 Unit No., Setting the .........................................7-22
Batch Change ...................................................... 7-132 Compatible OSs .......................................................1-3
Batch Change windows, Reading.................. 7-135 Confirmation Message Display, Changing .............5-54
Batch Change windows, Saving .................... 7-134 Connecting lines
Batch Monitor................................................ 7-73, 8-48 connecting lines, Deleting.................................6-80
Batch Monitor window, Reading the ....... 7-77, 8-53 connecting lines, Entering ................................6-78
Batch Monitor window, Saving the.......... 7-76, 8-52 Continuous scan execution ....................................8-16
Bit Devices ON/OFF, Turning................................. Continuous step execution .....................................8-24
......................... 7-55, 7-80, 7-91, 8-37, 8-55, 8-65 Control Memory (CM) for KV-D30, Clearing ..........7-72
turn devices ON/OFF, Using keys to........................ Control Memory CM .............................................. A-52
APPENDICES
........................... 7-55, 7-80, 7-91, 8-37, 8-55, 8-66 Control Relays CR................................................. A-47
turn devices ON/OFF, Using the mouse to .............. Conversion
........................... 7-55, 7-80, 7-91, 8-37, 8-55, 8-65 Conversion, Errors That Occur by ..................... A-6
Blink .............................................................. 9-13, 9-15 Conversion, Executing....................................6-141
Break Conditions, Setting ...................................... 8-18 copied or cut ladder data, Pasting..........................6-91
breakpoints, Specifying ......................................... 8-27 CPU positioning instructions, Entering...................6-71
specified breakpoints, To cancel ...................... 8-27 CPU positioning parameters, Setting printing of ..6-160
Current Values/Setting Values/Attributes, Changing.....
[C] ................................. 7-56, 7-81, 7-91, 8-38, 8-56, 8-66
Calendar Timer, Setting the ................................... 7-70 Currently Placed Units, Setting ..............................5-32
“Cancel” button (Panel Editor) ........................ 9-7, 9-8 cursor movement unit, Setting the .........................5-47
Change data ................................................. 9-13, 9-15 Custom Monitor ....................................................7-103
Circuit Libraries...................................................... 6-96 Custom Monitor, Displaying............................7-103
Circuit Libraries, Displaying ................................... 6-97 Custom Monitors, Registering ........................7-104
Circuit Libraries, Importing and Exporting ........... 6-100
Circuit Library, Cautions When Using.................... 6-96 [D]
Circuits, Registering............................................... 6-98 D/A Conversion Unit Monitor................................7-121
circuit libraries, Exporting............................... 6-101 Data access panel, Editing the.................................9-5
circuit libraries, Importing ............................... 6-100 Data Access Panel, Setting the..............................9-12
Registered Circuits, Deleting ........................... 6-98 Data access panel system parameters ....................9-9
Registered Circuits, Pasting............................. 6-99 Data access panel system parameters area............9-4
Data format................................................... 9-13, 9-15
A-83
10 Index
A-84
10 Index
[L] [O]
labels, comments and verify information, Setting “OK” button ....................................................... 9-7, 9-8
printing of ............................................................. 6-158 On display page No. DM ................................ 9-9, 9-10
Labels, Displaying................................6-25, 7-52, 8-34 Online Edit Features.............................................7-142
APPENDICES
ladder diagrams, Setting printing of..................... 6-156 Online Edit Function, Cautions Upon Using the...7-142
Ladder Edit view ...................................................... 9-5 Online Edit mode, Available edit functions in .......7-144
Ladder program is already open, When a ............. 7-18 Online Edit, Starting/Stopping ..............................7-143
Ladder program is not opened, When a ................ 7-19 Online Editing .......................................................7-145
Ladder Programs, Transferring.............................. 7-40 Online editing and returning to a Monitor, Stopping......
Ladder Monitor window at the bottom of the screen, ........................................................................7-146
Displaying the ........................................................ 7-54 Online editing and returning to a Editor, Stopping ........
ladder program while the PLC is in the Run mode, ........................................................................7-146
Writing the.............................................................. 7-40 Operands
ladder programs, device comments and unit setup Operands, Changing ........................................6-76
information, Saving and reading............................ 4-15 Operands, Replacing......................................6-132
Ladder Rungs into Comments, Turning................6-119 operands in registered circuits, Replacing .............6-99
ladder rungs that can be edited, Maximum number of Operating Environment and System Configuration..1-3
................................................................................. 6-2
Compatible OSs..................................................1-3
list display by individual unit, Edit by ................... 6-105 Free space on hard disk .....................................1-3
Load device comment.............................................. 9-6 Option .......................................................................9-7
other files, Copying from ........................................6-92
[M]
Memory Cards ......................................................... 4-1
Memory Card, Saving and Reading Data from KV [P]
BUILDER to ........................................................... 4-15
Page No........................................................ 9-13, 9-15
Memory Cards, Data Stored on ....................... 4-14
Page call dev: leading relay/DM..................... 9-9, 9-10
A-85
10 Index
A-86
10 Index
settings, Canceling ........... 8-39, 8-50, 8-57, 8-61, 8-67 Unit No., Setting the ...............................................7-22
Simulator, Exiting ................................................... 8-15 Unit Registration Wizard, Using the .......................5-33
Simulator, Starting up ............................................ 8-14 Unit Setup Information and Unit Comments, Importing
Simulator Restrictions.............................................. 8-2 ................................................................................5-35
Common restrictions .......................................... 8-2 Unit Specifications as CSV Files, Saving...............6-41
Restrictions when using KV-10/16/24/40........... 8-3 unit specifications, Setting printing of...................6-161
Restrictions when using KV-700 ........................ 8-5 Unit Viewer ...........................................................6-139
Simulator, Special devices supported by .... 8-3, 8-5 Unit configuration window ......................................5-14
Single Scan, Executing.......................................... 8-17 Unit placement area ...............................................5-13
Special auxiliary relays ..........................................A-43 Unit setup window ..................................................5-15
Special devices supported by Simulator........... 8-3, 8-5 Units, Placing .........................................................5-23
specified rungs or steps, Jumping to ............................. Units, Reserving .....................................................5-37
...........................................................6-122, 7-58, 8-40 USB, Cannot Use .................................................. A-82
start and end of rungs, Jumping to the .......................... USB Card Reader/Writer..........................................4-9
...........................................................6-128, 7-62, 8-44 USB Driver, Installing the .......................................1-24
Switch assignment relay No. ..................................9-11 use status of devices as a list, Displaying the......6-137
Switch/buzzer configuration............................ 9-8, 9-11 User Data Files.........................................................3-4
System Configurations, Printing ............................ 5-40 Using keys to select devices .........................................
System Errors ......................................................... A-2 ................................. 7-54, 7-79, 7-90, 8-36, 8-54, 8-65
System Errors (displayed on Monitor) ..................... A-8 Using keys to turn devices ON/OFF..............................
System Parameters ................................................. 9-8 ................................. 7-55, 7-80, 7-91, 8-37, 8-55, 8-66
Data access panel system parameters.............. 9-8 Using the mouse to select devices................................
Message panel system parameters................... 9-8 ................................. 7-54, 7-79, 7-90, 8-36, 8-54, 8-65
Switch/buzzer configuration ............................... 9-8 Using the mouse to turn devices ON/OFF ....................
System Relay/DM Assignments, Checking ........... 5-30 ................................. 7-55, 7-80, 7-91, 8-37, 8-55, 8-65
[T] [V]
Temperature Controller Unit Monitor ................... 7-129 vertical cursor, Moving the......................................8-74
Temporary Data Memory .......................................A-46 view mode, Changing the.................... 6-22, 7-49, 8-32
Time Chart Operations .......................................... 7-99 Grid ................................................ 6-23, 7-50, 8-32
File save..........................................................7-114 XYM ............................................... 6-23, 7-50, 8-32
time chart gradations, Setting the number of........... view size, Changing the ...................... 6-22, 7-49, 8-31
.............................................................. 7-100, 8-75
[W]
APPENDICES
time charts, How to view .................................. 8-73
time charts, Reading .......................................7-115 wait time, Setting the ..............................................8-20
timers and counters, Entering................................ 6-65 watchdog timer, Setting the ....................................8-22
Title Screen, Setting Animation of ....................... 6-169 wiring examples................................... 1-15, 1-16, 1-17
top or bottom rungs of ladder programs, Jumping
to the ..................................................6-123, 7-59, 8-41 [X]
Trigger attribute setup...........................................7-110 XYM..................................................... 6-23, 7-50, 8-32
Trigger conditions .................................................7-111
[U]
Undo (Undoing the previous edit operation).......... 6-83
Unit Colors, Changing.......................................... 6-167
Unit Detailed Settings, Displaying ......................... 5-31
Unit Display Scale, Changing the .......................... 5-45
Unit Editor
Unit Editor Display Color, Changing the .......... 5-48
Unit Editor Operations, Flow of .........................5-11
Unit Editor, Errors That Occur on.....................A-13
Unit Editor, Exiting............................................ 5-22
Unit Editor, Starting Up ................................... 5-21
Unit Editor Display Color, Changing the ................ 5-48
Unit Monitor ..........................................................7-116
A-87
Revision History
Printing Date Version Revision Details
May 2003 Ver 1.00
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS:
(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any
models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were used
merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to
represent that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or
samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE
with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and
examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option,
will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products
found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting
from any action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper installation,
improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification, misapplication
and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness,
moisture, vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products.
They are only suggestions, and it is Buyer's responsibility to ascertain the
fitness of the Products for Buyer's intended use. KEYENCE will not be
responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples ("Products/Samples") supplied to Buyer are not
to be used internally in humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or
fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise. Should any
Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way,
KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify
KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or damage
whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.